Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

scope. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. click Training Files. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans.rte. and schedules required for a building project. For most tutorial projects. construction. In this case. the door retains this relationship to the partition. quantities. drawings. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and click Open. If the length of the elevation is changed. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. you will use the default template. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 13 Click OK. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. If you move the partition. schedules. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. review the Revit Architecture templates. and phases when you need it. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and open Metric\Templates. sections. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and customize the project as necessary. how to navigate the user interface. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. 12 Select DefaultMetric. In the Revit Architecture model. the parameter is one of association or connection. the hierarchy of elements. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. drawing sheets. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. You learn the terminology. every drawing sheet. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. hence. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.

For example. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. levels. For example. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. dimensions. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers.When you change something. programming is not required. walls and roofs are hosts. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. filled regions. grids. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. tags. windows. and roofs are model elements. doors. and keynotes are annotation elements. If you can draw. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. windows. Examples include detail lines. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. doors. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and cabinets are model components. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and 2D detail components. Understanding the Basics | 7 . dimensions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. They help to describe or document the model. They display in relevant views of the model. walls. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Datum elements help to define project context.

you can explicitly control them. Often. views of the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. and types. By using a single project file. families. for example. you must be in a section or elevation view. To place levels. such as roofs. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. for example. Project: In Revit Architecture. The project file contains all information for the building design. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. or bottom of foundation. first floor. However. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. top of wall. and so forth). section views. Most often. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. floors. This information includes components used to design the model. schedules. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and ceilings. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. from geometry to construction data. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and drawings of the design. In other cases. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects.In Revit Architecture. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. elevation views.

Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and similar graphical representation. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. However. ceilings. System families can be transferred between projects. identical use. In the following illustration. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). dimensions. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and levels. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. categories of model elements include walls and beams. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. In the steps that follow. A type can be a specific size of a family. floors. making it easy to understand what each button represents. the user interface is labeled. System families include walls. For example. A type can also be a style. specifically its clear user interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. roofs. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door.

In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

For example. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. Edit. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. While working in the drawing area. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. you type the required key combination to perform the command. and View. which are listed on the menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

When you select the Door tool. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. 9 In the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. when you add a door. a door type is specified. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

The Show Design Bars dialog displays.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. In the drawing area. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.11 Click OK. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. select Views (all). 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. click the tab in the Design Bar.

making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. delete. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 3D). double-click its name. sheets. families. To open a view. and rename views. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. family category (doors. and group name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. The browser is dockable. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. elevations. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . schedules. windows). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. reports. walls. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. and groups. families. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The cursor displays as a pencil. In this case. click Cancel. click Wall.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. Do not click. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. After creating a browser organization scheme. In the bottom left corner of the window. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. The status bar also provides information. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. In addition. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. After you are familiar with these tasks. In the status bar. 20 Press TAB. click on the Standard toolbar. regarding selected elements in a view. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view.18 On the Design Bar. Click the Help button. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. There are several tools that help you find information. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. Windows: From any window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . You can use this tri-pane. press F1 for context-sensitive help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. press F1 for help. find a keyword on the Index tab. When you place the cursor over an element. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. If no Help button displays. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. in conjunction with tooltips. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. click Modify to end the Wall command. It highlights when the cursor is over it. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). You can also press SHIFT+F1. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Toolbar: From the toolbar. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. For example. click Training Files. 5 On the View toolbar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the drawing area. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the view zooms out from the building model.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. In the following steps. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. When you release the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . NOTE As you zoom in and out. . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. As you move the mouse. on the View toolbar. 10 To display SteeringWheels.

moving the wheel to the desired location. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and then using the Zoom tool again. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. These are the drag controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. called drag controls. and double-click 2nd Flr.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and click the SteeringWheels tab. and select the wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Similar controls. Small blue dots. and click Help. display along the ends. 15 To exit the wheel. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). For more information about SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. 17 Type ZR. expand Floor Plans. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. bottoms. Cnst. as shown.

After selecting the element to move. Some commands. 23 Click next to the lower wall. In this case. moving the cursor to the left horizontally.18 Click and drag the left control. for example. click to specify the starting position. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. as shown. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. require 2 clicks to complete the command. The table moves down. click (Move). you want to move the table closer to the wall. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . to lengthen the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and on the Tools toolbar.

Some commands. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the second item in the list. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Move. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click Lines. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. In this example. 24 Select the plant. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the Undo command. and click again to end it. such as the Lines command. and drag it on top of the table. 26 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice.29 To end the command. On the Design Bar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. or referenced as a drafting view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. In Revit Architecture. but for training purposes. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. In this tutorial. Use detail components to define an assembly. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. detail. When you have finished these tutorials. illustrating how building components work together. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. and annotate building assemblies. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. 27 . you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools.

create a reference callout. click Drafting View. click Training Files. and reference a drafting view. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. and click OK.rvt. you will create a drafting view. If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 2 In the Drafting View dialog. for Name. scroll until the folder is displayed.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. 3 In the Scale list. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Window Head Detail. import a DWG detail. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.In the Project Browser. as shown. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 6 In the Colors field list. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.dwg. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. 10 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. located directly to the left of the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. The drawing area is still blank. The model zooms out. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 9 Type ZR. select Black and White. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. displaying the extents of the detail. click Training Files. and click Open.).

in the Type Selector. click Callout. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the drawing area. to activate the view selection list. select Detail View: Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. and in the Scale list. 13 Click Reference other view. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.The view displays to the specified area.

The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.The reference callout is created. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. and in the Scale list. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Detail View: Detail. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. select Callout. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click the reference callout tag head. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. c_express_workshop_details_start. in the Type Selector. 3 In the drawing area. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components.

click Modify to clear the selection.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click Rename. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Right-click Detail 0. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. for Name. under Detail Views(Detail). Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. enter Wall Base 1. and click OK.

This is the view crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . bordered by a solid line. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

for Display Model. right-click. under Graphics. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. 16 Click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. select As Underlay. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. and click View Properties.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The model elements in the view display as half-tones.

Brick on Mtl. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. on the Options Bar. click Detail Components. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. By grouping detail components. 20 In the drawing area. Directly above the drawing area. and press ENTER. If the crop region is enlarged. typical details can easily be placed. type 1' 6''. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 17 On the View Control Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . 19 In the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. Stud.

26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 25 In the Project Browser. as shown. 23 Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. add the following detail components as shown. click Modify to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.

4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command.

Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. in the type selector. For more information about customizing a keynote database. c_express_workshop_details_start. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and under Keynote Table. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Leader. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. and format keynote styles. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. click Keynote ➤ Element. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and Free End are selected. and verify that Horizontal. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. for Full Path. click Training Files. special notes. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. or instructions within a construction documentation package. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. click Browse. You can customize this list. map keynotes by material. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element.txt.

7 Click to place the leader arm. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. Keynoting | 39 . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. Either move the text inside. 8 Click to place the tag.5 In the drawing area. If no value has been specified. 9 Press ESC to end the command. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . a question mark displays. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 16 In the drawing area. and click OK. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 13 Click to place the tag. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 15 Select 07 21 00. click Keynote ➤ Material.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Creating Details with Revit Architecture. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click OK. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Select Keynote Tags. Only the keynotes remain selected. 19 In the Type Selector. Click Check None.All items within the selection display in red. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. legends. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .Boxed.

update the project information element properties. Place views on drawing sheets. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. you will create a sheet. but for training purposes.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add labels to a title block. In this lesson. In this exercise. and modify and update the project sheet title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. or in the element properties of the title block.rvt. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In the Project Browser. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. 3 Click OK. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. click Training Files. In Revit Architecture.

Smith and press ENTER. 8 On the Design Bar. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. click Modify to clear the selection. 6 In the Title Block. For Name. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. enter Sections/Details. 5 In the drawing area. under Sheets(all). Then. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. roll the wheel.Unnamed. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.4 Type ZR. 7 Enter K. hold down the wheel and drag. Click OK. In this tutorial. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. To pan. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. To zoom in and out. right-click A602 . 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. you can enter ZE to zoom out. double-click Checker. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.

and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 16 Type ZR. For Client Name. Smith.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter Design Development. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . click Text. For Project Name. 13 Click OK. enter 4/10/2008. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 15 In the Options Bar. For Project Status. 20 Click and type Project Status. (Left) is selected. in the Type Selector. The Family Editor opens. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. select Text : 1/8''. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. select the title block.

click Label. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Modify to exit the command.21 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. as shown. select Label : 3/16''. 23 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and verify that (Top) are selected. under Category Parameters. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 22 Using the same method. 29 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Load into Project). as shown.

click Browse.Project. place and modify a keynote legend. representing the view or schedule. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and click Yes. for Full Path. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Name. and under Keynote Table. a viewport displays. In this exercise. enter Keynote Legend . 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. you will create. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Training Files. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. to a drawing sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. Next you will create.txt.

under Sheets (all). TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click OK. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. expand Legends. under Text.Sections/Details. and drag Keynote Legend . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . clear Show Headers.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. on the Appearance tab. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 . as shown.

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.Project as shown. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. not keynotes. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. at the bottom of the Filter tab. right-click Keynote Legend . expand Detail Views (Detail). for View Name. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 In the Project Browser. for Filter. as shown. The Keynote Legend is now blank. under Legends. select Filter by sheet. enter Keynote Legend . and click OK. click Edit. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. and click OK.Sheet.Project. and click Properties.

The view remains selected.Title Sheet 1. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. under Sheets (all).The keynote legend is automatically updated. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A0 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. The view title with line displays below the viewport. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . 2 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.

Press ESC to clear the selection.When you place a view on a sheet. by default. as shown. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. define the information to include in a view title. The drawing list remains selected. 5 In the Project Browser. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. or omit view titles from sheets. 6 Type ZR. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 3 In the Type Selector. and zoom in on the drawing list. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. As part of a construction document set. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet.

including only sheets that contain views. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Ceiling Plans. right-click the selected sheets. select A602 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties.Sections/Details and select A801 . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). while pressing SHIFT. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. The drawing list display is updated. clear Appears In Drawing List.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. and click OK.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. it is good practice to test the constraints. a central service core. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. 57 . Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you develop the building design. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. a curtain wall. For example. If the grid moves. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model.

Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. construction. select Project. with an RVT extension. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. notice four elevation markers. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. To create the project file. you will use the default template. 5 Click OK. In the drawing area in the right pane.rte. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. After the beginning exercises. and customize the project as necessary. such as a door or window. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you design inside the elevation markers. levels. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. In views that display elevation markers. For this project. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. Creating the Project In this exercise. views. verify that the second option is selected. West. from the product library. The project is stored as a single file. but contains no geometry. under Projects. 3 Under Template file. In practice. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. and residential. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. click New. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you load any required family type that is not in your project. East. you use a template that is provided with the software. South. and settings. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and click Browse. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. The new project opens. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. click Training Files.

This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Groups. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. double-click South. change their properties.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. then expand Floor Plans. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. schedules. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Sheets (all). and duplicate levels. and Elevations (Building Elevation). As you design and document your building model. locate the Project Browser. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. expand Views (all). as well as change their names. 7 If necessary. NOTE If you create a project without a template. sheets. will be accessible from the Project Browser. and other properties. Schedules/Quantities. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 8 Under Floor Plans.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. duplicate them. such as schedules and legends. Families. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. created by the template. display in the south elevation. content and building model reports. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 14 For File name. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Ceiling Plans. 13 In the file window. heights. enter Revit Retail Building. These views are customizable: you can rename them. double-click Metric. You can add. delete. Creating the Project | 59 . notice the Legends. and delete them. and elevation views created in the project by the template. and families in your project. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Two level lines. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). reflected ceiling plan views. the view you see in the drawing area. and click Training Files.

and windows within the building model. and press ENTER.15 For Save as type. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Project Levels on page 60. to each other. You learn how the levels are locked. you will want to save your work frequently. After you modify the two default levels. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). When you begin designing. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Views (all). and on the General tab.rvt) is selected. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. verify that Project Files (*. or constrained. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. doors. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. the other levels move and change with it. 16 Click Save. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. so that when one level moves. view the Save reminder interval. enter 00 Foundation. and double-click South.

Next. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Basics. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 14 Click Plan View Types. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. Adding Project Levels | 61 . By default. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. This is the Options Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and click OK. If it does not. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 13 On the Options Bar. enter -1800. which should display by default. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. view the Design Bar. click Level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. When you add the new level. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and then move it up. not all the tabs are visible. enter 0. and press ENTER. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. right-click. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and press ENTER.

18 In the Project Browser. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 21 In the Project Browser. and press ESC. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 23 On the Options Bar. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.As you move the cursor. right-click Level 3. click (Pick Lines). 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. If you create a level by copying it. and for Offset. or on the Design Bar. and move it slightly upward. Next. and rename the corresponding views. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 16 Enter 3750. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 19 Click OK. enter 3750. 26 Press ESC. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. you add another level. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. click Modify to end the command. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 25 Click to place the level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click Rename. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and enter 02 Level. click Level. under Floor Plans. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. using a different option. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line.

Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Adding Project Levels | 63 . the levels are no longer constrained. and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. If you select a level and click its lock. as shown. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. all the levels move. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.

you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. In the following exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When the grid is complete. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. click Grid. select (Draw). you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. under Floor Plans. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. In a later exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. 3 On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. specify a start point for the grid line. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections.

Enter A. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. On the Options Bar. click Grid. enter 4500 mm. Click to place the grid line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and click to place the line. Next. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. for Offset. and click to place the line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . enter 7500 mm. and for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. click (Pick Lines).5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. On the Options Bar.

specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid. as shown. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Options Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.

click Dimension. 15 Starting with grid line A. 21 Press ESC twice. 14 On the Options Bar. select grid lines C and 3. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. click Dimension. click (Aligned). 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 22 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.

building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. If necessary. click and drag the blue circular grip up. and select None. click Edit/New. 31 For End Segments Length. until it is closer to grid line A. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 6. until it is closer to grid line 5. 32 Click OK twice. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the value for Center Segment. Two pins display on the grid lines. enter 50mm. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 29 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. and press ESC. At the left endpoint of the grid line. and press ESC. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and click OK. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). The pins are hidden. click . 24 Press ESC. and select grid line A. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. By pinning these central grid lines.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. select grid line 5. 26 In the drawing area. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and on the Options Bar.

Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type.5mm Bubble. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 35 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines. and on the Options Bar. and press ESC.5mm Bubble with Gap. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. click (Grid Intersection). click Finish. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 39 In the Type Selector. For Place By. 37 Select the grid lines again. and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 36 On the Design Bar. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click Structural Column. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.

and unlock it. select 01 Entry Level. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. Next. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 45 While pressing CTRL. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Press ESC. If it is unlocked. under Floor Plans. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Activate Dimensions. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 47 Enter 9000. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 46 On the Options Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. click Camera. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. lock it. select grid line A. for From. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . and click to place the target point of the camera.

enter To Building. and click Rename. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. displays in bold under 3D Views. Adding Beams on page 72. Right-click 3D View 1. When you finish adding beams.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. and click OK. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. named 3D View 1 by default. under Views (all). ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and then copy them to subsequent levels. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. expand 3D Views. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. In the Rename View dialog. The current view. Adding Beams In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

4 Click Medium. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. under Floor Plans. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under 3D Views. Adding Beams | 73 . click (Create Beam On Grid). verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click Beam. The selected grid lines display as red. 6 In the Type Selector. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 8 While pressing CTRL.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Finish. 9 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. the icon on the right side of the scale. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click 01 Entry Level. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands.

select 06 Roof. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. click (Default 3D View). select 02 Level. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. right-click. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. press and hold SHIFT. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry Level. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 12 On the View toolbar. 14 Select one of the beams. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

view the Top Level parameter. right-click. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. (Element Properties). 25 In the Project Browser. for Top Level. and click OK. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. When you created the columns. click 24 Press ESC. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column.to the 5th level. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. select 06 Roof. and if necessary. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 20 Click Cancel. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and click Element Properties. under Instance Parameters. 21 With the column selected. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. double-click To Building. All of the columns display as red. 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Beams | 75 . 22 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. and click Select All Instances.

as lines only. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. double-click South. but you want to display them in less detail. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 28 Save the drawing. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. under Elevations.

under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 . you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 3 On the Options Bar.29 Proceed to the next exercise. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces In this exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces on page 77.

78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but when placed the braces are placed. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. After you add the final brace. The associated framing elevation view displays. and when the endpoint snap displays. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 11 Using the same technique. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 7 On the Design Bar. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. click to specify the start point of the brace.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. click Brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. press ESC twice. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 8 In the Type Selector.

The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Adding Braces | 79 .Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

but this time add them from right to left. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. under Floor Plans. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click 00 Foundation. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. enter 10000 mm. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.

NOTE As you add braces. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces | 81 . and on the Options Bar. 21 Select grid line A.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. and press ENTER. as shown in the 3D view below. under Floor Plans. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. enter 12000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. click Activate Dimensions. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 23 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.

you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 31 Save the drawing. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. beams. click and roof height. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click South. double-click {3D}. 26 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. under Elevations. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and drag it away from the structure. under Floor Plans. lock it. under 3D Views. grid size.24 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation.

In the Element Properties dialog. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and click View Properties. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. under View Depth. and how to load specific families into a project. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and drag it to the drawing area. click Edit. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Training Files. double-click 00 Foundation.Before you can add the pile caps. and expand Structural Foundations. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. and press ESC twice. After you load the pile cap family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. A warning displays. The pile cap has been added in the view. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). expand Families.rfa. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the View Range dialog. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. select Unlimited. The foundation pile cap now displays. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. under Extents. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. for Level. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for View Range. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Create Similar. 13 In the Project Browser. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC twice. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed.

rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. you change the types of the columns. beams. right-click. click Training Files. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. You load new column. and brace families into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure.14 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. All columns in the building model display as red. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. and click Select All Instances. and braces that you used to create the building structure. double-click {3D}. 2 Select one of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . beam. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. and changing its size parameter. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. double-click Elevation 1-a. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. the braces as well as the beams change.2X101. click (Default 3D View). The building model displays the round hollow columns. right-click.3 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click Edit/New. 19 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. enter 75mm. click Duplicate. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. you change the brace type. 17 While pressing CTRL. 9 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Name dialog. The brace type changes. and click Select All Instances. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 7 On the Design Bar. for Type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. click (Element Properties). click Brace. and click OK. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). enter 75mm. click Modify. click Modify.5CHS. click Modify. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 4 On the Design Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm.9. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. In the following steps. under Dimensions.6X15. This not the size that you want to use. for d. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser.

Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.rvt.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.Origin to Origin. 3 Under Positioning. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. and click Open. click Training Files. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. After the files are linked. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Auto . the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.

click Copy. In this case. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model.4 In the Project Browser. and click Select Link. 6 In the drawing area. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 9 In the drawing area. under Elevations. however. double-click South. 8 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and walls could also be copy/monitored. 5 On the Tools toolbar. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. depending on the project. select the linked Revit model. select Levels 00 through 06. structural members. After the link is established. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. click (Copy/Monitor). 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. while pressing CTRL. Grids.

select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). delete the Level 2 floor plan. and click Delete. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. click Finish. click OK. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. First. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 13 On the Design Bar.10 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. for Floor Plan views. 18 Using the same method. right-click Level 1. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. while pressing SHIFT. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish mode.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. enter Floor Plans. select the Topography : Surface. 25 In the View Templates dialog. for Name. double-click 00 Foundation. 24 In the New View Template dialog. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click.19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. 26 In the Project Browser. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. click OK. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. and click OK. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 34 In the 3D view that displays.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Names. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. select Floor Plans. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. double-click Site. click Camera. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser.

and click Rename. Adding Floors In this exercise. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and railings are also created from sketches. Adding Floors on page 92. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter To Building. To create floors. and click OK. click Training Files. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . stairs. expand 3D Views. such as roofs. 36 In the Rename View dialog.35 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. right-click 3D View 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise.

On the Sketch tab.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. select the top floor line. and elements in the current view display as gray. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. click Lines. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Do not lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. Adding Floors | 93 . If the grid changes size. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. You are now in the Sketch Editor. past the first vertical grid line. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click (Rectangle). ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Move the cursor to the left. Leave this dimension unlocked. At the top left corner of the grid. click Floor. and then the first horizontal grid line. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. under Floor Plans.

press ENTER. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Modify. and change their values to 300 mm. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select and lock the dimensions. and then press ESC. They display on the floor sketch.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. At the top left corner of the grid. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Enter 300. and click the temporary dimension value. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. select the top floor line.

click Floor. double-click 02 Level. On the Sketch tab. Select the three remaining floor lines. enter 1500mm. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and press ESC. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). The 02 Level floor sketch displays.8 Select the floor. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. On the Options Bar. click Lines. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and on the Options Bar. Next. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click Edit. Adding Floors | 95 . on the Design Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Quit Sketch. and for Offset. using a different sketching technique. under Floor Plans. and lock the dimensions. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.

The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The 02 Level floor displays. click Lines. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. click (Align). 17 On the Sketch tab. and a lock icon displays. click (Rectangle). 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 On the Design Bar. click Floor. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 18 On the Options Bar. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. Click the locks to constrain the floors. double-click 03 Level. under Floor Plans. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar.

35 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. and lock the edges. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Edit. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. and on the Options Bar. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. under Floor Plans. Alternatively. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 32 Select the floor. double-click {3D}. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.24 On the Design Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Adding Floors | 97 . click Finish Sketch. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid.

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Click (Pick Lines). ■ ■ For Offset. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Adding a Roof In this exercise. click Lines. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click to place the roof line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. When a blue dashed line displays. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Adding a Roof on page 98. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files.rvt. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. To create the roof. double-click 06 Roof. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. and press ENTER. enter 1800 mm. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

and when the blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof | 99 . enter 300 mm. for Offset.6 Select grid line 5. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. click to place the roof line. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.10 Press ESC. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the roof. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).

and press ENTER. for Elevation. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. on grid D. click Section. enter -100 mm. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. click (Add new points to the slab shape). Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. move the cursor down below the roof. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. 15 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 .14 On the Options Bar.

select Variable.20 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 30 Click OK 3 times. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. click Edit. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click Edit/New. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Structure [1]. for Structure. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. In section. and on the Options Bar. select the roof. under Construction. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. double-click 06 Roof.

select each edge. select Fascia : Fascia . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. zoom in to the roof. 37 If necessary. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. Adding a Roof | 103 . 40 In the Type Selector. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the warning dialog.Roof Edge. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. moving counter-clockwise. select the section line. click OK. In this case. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click (Default 3D View). and press DELETE. 41 Starting with the left front edge. on the View Control Bar. click Modify. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar.31 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 38 In the 3D view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. double-click To Building.42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. click Modify. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a curtain wall. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the curtain wall resizes with it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. so if you resize the grid.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Construction. under Floor Plans. select 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. select 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. for Spacing. enter Retail Storefront. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 1050 mm. For Offset. The type is saved in the project.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Type. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click to place the first curtain wall segment. When you duplicate a type. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Name dialog. For Level. enter 2100 mm. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. Click OK twice. and click OK. click 01 Entry Level. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click Wall. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). for Join Condition. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. click Duplicate. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. For Height. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). for Spacing. enter 600 mm. select Curtain Wall : Storefront.

click (Trim/Extend). the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. and lock the dimensions. 13 On the Design Bar. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. 15 On the View Control Bar. and trim each curtain wall segment. you can delete the dimensions. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. If you want to hide them. click Dimension. If the grid moves. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so they remain in the view. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. These dimensions are not in a sketch. double-click To Building.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Creating an Entrance | 107 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files.rvt.

under the element list. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 On the Model Categories tab.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click None. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 7 Click OK. All the elements in the list are selected. and double-click South. clear one element to clear all the elements. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. Do not select Columns. under Views (all). 5 Under Visibility. click All. as these usually represent internal pilasters.

click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.9 On the Design Bar. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. and click OK. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 18 On the View Control Bar. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 16 On the View Control Bar. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 10 Select 1 panel. in this case an architectural elevation. press and hold CTRL. 12 With the panels selected. select Architectural Elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. select System Panel : Solid. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 In the Project Browser. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. double-click {3D}.

double-click To Building. under 3D Views. double-click South. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser.

31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click Add or Remove Segments.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. select another mullion to the right. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 32 In the Type Selector. and unpin it. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

and view the new entrance. select it. press TAB until it is selected.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click (Default 3D View). 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 34 On the View toolbar. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . open the North elevation.38 Press DELETE. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 40 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 39 Using the same process. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and 4th panels. remove the mullions from the 2nd. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 3rd.

under Graphics. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. under Floor Plans. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. select 02 Level. for Underlay. 3 Right-click in the view. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.

and click Rename. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and click to complete the callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog. select the grip closest to the callout head. which indicates you must draw the callout. under Floor Plans.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. The cursor changes to a pencil. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. enter Display Area. and click OK. click Callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 8 Select the callout.

right-click. 12 Draw a section line. 14 Press ESC. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. click Section. 13 Select the section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Flip Section. 16 Select the section box. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. as shown.

enter Section Display Area. select Basic Wall : Interior . select Wall faces. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. For Loc Line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). Lock both alignments. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 27 On the Options Bar.17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior. 18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Prefer. right-click Section 1. 21 In the Type Selector. and click Rename. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. click (Align). click Wall. under Floor Plans. 24 On the Tools toolbar. Click (Rectangle).135mm Partition (2-hr). 25 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. click Ceiling. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click Section Display Area. under Sections (Building Section). 38 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid.) 36 Press ESC twice. Next. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Type Selector. under Ceiling Plans. 37 In the Project Browser.

under Constraints. click to select it. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 Press ESC. under Ceiling Plans. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click Attach. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. enter 2700 mm. enter 2700 mm. for Height Offset From Level. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. and click OK. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ESC. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. under Constraints. for Top/Base. for Base Offset. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click to select the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Options Bar. under Sections. Select the 02 Level Floor.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar.

for Structure. 54 Click OK. click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Type. click Edit/New. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Edit. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click . 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Construction.49 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Ceiling Plans. click Cancel. click (Rotate). 56 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. 61 Press ESC. enter 45. and press ENTER.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows Off. double-click To Building. click Shadows On. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Optionally. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. under 3D Views.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 65 On the View Control Bar.

3 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor over grid line B. double-click 01 Entry Level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . enter 1500 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.rvt. and click to create a reference plane to the right. click Training Files. and click to create a reference plane to the left. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and copy it to the 05 Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and for Offset. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise.

and 3. 7 Using the same method. click Modify. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. C. click Stairs. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.5 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 2. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and select the 2nd reference plane. select Basic Wall : Generic . including its handrails. Click (Rectangle). 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. click Wall. and specify a point. Move the cursor down. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.225mm Masonry. 10 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . The complete stair displays. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left.

15 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and click to select it. and lock the alignment. Click Modify. and press ENTER. Select the wall. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Lock the dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. select the dimension value. select Wall faces. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. click Dimension. enter 1200 mm. for Prefer. click Align. 18 Using the same technique. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and specify a point away from the wall. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the interior face of the wall.

select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. TIP To flip the door swing. 24 On the Standard toolbar. clear Tag on Placement. (Undo). press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 23 Select the stair. The stair and walls move to the left. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. 25 While pressing CTRL. and press DELETE. 27 In the Type Selector. click Door. Because the dimension is constrained. select both reference planes. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. a warning displays. and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar.21 Select the dimension.

and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. For Top Constraint. (SteeringWheels). select 00 Foundation. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Default 3D View). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. and move the cursor to spin the building model. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. (Element Properties). Click OK. 44 On the Tools toolbar. (Rectangle). 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). under Floor Plans. 33 Select the stair. for Multistory Top Level. Under Constraints. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. select all 4 walls. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Base Constraint. but if you view the top level of the building.30 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Align. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. 35 On the View toolbar. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click 36 On the View toolbar.

52 In the Select Levels dialog. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and lock the alignment. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. on the View toolbar. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignments. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. click see the roof.

you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. enter 300 mm. 56 Select the shaft. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click 59 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level.55 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. (Default 3D View). you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. For Top Constraint. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. By offsetting the base. under Floor Plans. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). and click OK. (SteeringWheels). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.

for Underlay.rvt. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select 06 Roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 2 Right-click in the view. and click View Properties. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Graphics. click Wall. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 17 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and then select the right face of the wall. The exact placement is not important. 15 In the error dialog. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and click Open View. select Elevation: South. click Edit Profile.5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click Remove Constraints. click Lines.225mm Masonry. and click (Fillet arc). 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 11 In the Go To View dialog. enter 9750. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and on the Options Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . click . 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.

as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. and click (Circle). double-click {3D}. click . click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner.

you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

select M_RPC Tree . TIP After you place the 1st planter. click Component. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . 3 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Type Selector. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. between grid lines C and D. 5 On the Basics tab. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . click Training Files.5 Meters. as shown. and press ESC twice. under Floor Plans. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.4.

enter 2400 mm. under Dimensions.8 On the View toolbar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.5 Meters. for Height. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Name dialog. as shown. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. and click OK.5 Meters. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). click Floor. and in the Type Selector. 17 While pressing CTRL. 16 Click Apply.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. click Lines. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. double-click 05 Roof Garden. (Element Properties). and then click OK twice. select the 2 remaining trees. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Type. double-click 01 Entry Level. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. View the roof. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. select M_RPC Tree . 11 Select one of the trees. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. double-click {3D}. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. For Offset. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate.

for Offset. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). and click to sketch a line. 25 Using the same method. and click to place the line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .

36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. move the cursor up 900 mm. and click to finish the line. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 32 Press ESC. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click (Trim/Extend).

RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Select the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. 45 Click OK. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight.38 On the Design Bar. select M_RPC Male : Alex. Next. The completed sidewalk displays. enter -250 mm. under Constraints. as shown: (Element Properties). for Height Offset from Level. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Duplicate. enter Sidewalk. and click so he is facing the column. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. near Column E5. click Finish Sketch. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Component. click Edit/New. 48 In the Type Selector. 43 Click OK twice. select Rotate after placement. a photorealistic image displays. In plan view. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 42 In the Name dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . When you render an image. for Type.

you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. select M_RPC Beetle.NOTE If necessary. 56 Press ESC twice. click the car. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click (Element Properties). click Camera. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 54 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. about 30 degrees.

you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. and on the Options Bar. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 .59 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. under Elevations. click Pick Host. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and click OK. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 65 Click the sidewalk. If the sidewalk changes height. under Constraints. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. 63 Click the sidewalk. 66 Using the same method. 64 Select Alex. under 3D Views. 60 In the Project Browser. enter -300 mm. Next. double-click West. double-click To Building. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. When you select a host for a component.

the elements will be ungrouped in the project. and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . and shaft opening. you delete the entire stairwell. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click (Default 3D View). 5 On the View toolbar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click 6 On the View toolbar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. (SteeringWheels). walls. 4 Press DELETE. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 3 Select the entire stairwell.

under Floor Plans.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click (Align). click Modify. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. click OK. and on the Design Bar. expand Model. 14 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click 00 Foundation. and zoom in to the linked instance. double-click 01 Entry Level. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. expand Groups. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click m_RRB_core. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and notice that the linked file is listed. and click Create Instance.rvt. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.

click 21 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the core. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. and click to align the center. 20 On the View toolbar.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. or if the group layout is expected to change. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. click (top down view). (Default 3D View). click Modify. click Modify. (SteeringWheels). click Ungroup. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. 17 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 .

click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. where it is hosted within a railing family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. After you modify it. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. you add glass railings around the floor edges.

click Edit. The floor sketch displays. and expand Railings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 3 In the Conference project. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. in the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click (Split). and click to split the floor. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and Parapet. and open Metric\m_Conference. expand Renderings. click Training Files. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and select Glass.rvt.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Handrail only. click OK. double-click 02 Level. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. The rendering displays. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 5 Expand Railing. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. and double-click Lounge Perspective. expand Families. 8 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and on the Options Bar.

click Modify. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select grid line B. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Lines.15 On the Design Bar. click (Align). and click to place it. verify that Chain is not selected. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 18 On the Design Bar.

rvt project. click Railing. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. enter 100 mm. Lock the dimensions. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 31 In the Revit dialog. select Glass. 33 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Dimension. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click Railing Properties.26 Select grid line D. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Type. click (Align). 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and lock the alignment.

click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.37 On the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. 153 . a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and a roof garden. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. NOTE For training purposes. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. exterior fire stairs. lofty ceilings. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. balconies. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.

154 .

you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. 155 . and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. elevation.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. including plan. section. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. how to create section and elevation views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.

Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

12 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. click the current scale. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. Next. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1:100.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

11 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. under Views (all). enter South East. expand Floor Plans. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Section.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Elevations. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select Section: Building Section. 14 In the Type Selector. for Scale. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it. click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.

using the blue circular drag grip. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and double-click Section 1.21 On the Design Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 23 On the View Control Bar.

25 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

under Floor Plans. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. select Floor Plan.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Callout. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click to specify a point to complete the callout.rvt. Creating Callout Views | 167 .Resulting callout view . for Scale. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:50.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. and select the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang.7 On the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. double-click Section 1. click Modify. click Callout. under Sections (Building Sections). for Scale. select 1:50. Creating Callout Views | 169 . right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and click OK. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK.

click Training Files.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rfa. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. under Floor Plans. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. You change the appearance of the section mark head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click Open. select Custom-Section Head.

click Edit/New. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. . Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. select the section line. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Section Tail . and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab.Filled. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. for Section Head. 4 On the Design Bar. and select 3. Section Tail – Filled. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. enter Section Head – Custom.Custom. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. and can be applied to the section line. 19 Click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Head . and click OK. 17 Under Category. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. enter 12.5mm Square. click Duplicate. click Load into Project. 12 For Section Tag. scroll to Section Line. 10 On the floor plan.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and select 2. 22 In the Name dialog. clear any others. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and click OK. scroll to Section Marks. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 15 Under Category.

notice the square elevation markers that display. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. Click OK. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Load into Project. select 3.23 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Square. click Duplicate. 34 In the Name dialog. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. 39 Click OK twice. . clear all others. for Callout Tag. select the current project. select Square. select the callout. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . open Metric\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Callout Head. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. enter 12. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. For Line Weight. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 40 Press ESC. For Corner Radius. Click OK. select 12.5 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. for Elevation Tag. . click Edit/New. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click Open. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. 36 In the drawing. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 43 Under Category. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides. expand Callout Boundary. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and select 4. masking regions. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 45 For Line Pattern. You learn to create view templates. 49 Click OK. view regions. filters. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. scroll down to Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 46 Under Category. and select 7. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Dash.

To accomplish this. 2 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 5 On the View Control Bar. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. under Elevations. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and double-click East. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Zoom to Fit. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The crop region displays as red. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. click (Show Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. click (Hide Crop Region).

clear Entourage. under Visibility. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and section lines are now hidden in the view. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. elevation markers. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. levels. 11 Under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. grids. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. Callouts. Creating a View Template | 177 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

and click Apply View Template. click Apply. double-click North. and click OK. and click OK. right-click North. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. under Elevations. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. edit the crop region as before. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click East. 15 In the New View Template dialog. click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 17 In the Project Browser. 20 Using the same method.14 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Create View Template From View. 19 In the Select View Template dialog.

View Range and Plan Regions | 179 .rvt. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for Bottom. click Edit. select Level Below (Level 4). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. select Penthouse. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Click OK twice. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. right-click. double-click Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 In the Project Browser.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Under View Depth. and click Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties. for Level. select Level 4. right-click. select Level 4. Click OK twice. for Bottom. 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit. under Extents. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for View Range. under Floor Plans. Under View Depth.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Roof Plan. double-click Roof Plan.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. click Finish Sketch. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 13 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. click Lines. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. select Unlimited. click Plan Region. for View Range. select Unlimited. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . for Level. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Region Properties. 10 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. under Extents. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit.

rvt. After you apply the filter. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click the Filters tab. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. in this case. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser.17 On the Design Bar. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Views (all). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

select the red color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 16 Click OK. under Categories. Enter Hr. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click Edit/New. 14 In the Color dialog. click Remove. click <No Override>. Select contains. and click OK. for Pattern. 5 In the Filters dialog. 12 On the Filter tab. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. under Basic colors. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . for Color. enter Rated Walls. 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. under Filters. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. select Fire Rating. select Solid Fill. and click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Add. click OK. 9 Click OK. and click OK. select Walls. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and apply a color. for Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. 17 Using the same method. click (New).

Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. click Show Crop Region. 4 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Invisible lines. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 On the View menu. click Masking Region. 8 Select the crop region. 7 On the View menu. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Finish Sketch. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. click in the Patterns field. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click 1: 50. 1 In the Project Browser. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click. click black. right-click. under Floor Plans.Level 1. for Color. 7 Under Cut. and click Override. select Solid fill. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall.rvt. for Pattern. and click Rename. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Walls. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 4 On the View Control Bar. click <No Override> to apply a color. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. right-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK. under Visibility. 11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. click the current scale.

click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Under Visibility. under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines.20 Right-click. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Color. click Override. for Pattern. 23 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines. click a purple color. select Dash. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 25 Click OK twice. By using the previous method to make the selection.

and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click.28 For Color. select a bright green color. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click By Category Override. click . 32 Select one of the lamps. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK twice. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click . 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets.33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.rvt. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.Creating Sheets. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet. and click View. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. right-click. select A0 metric.

and select the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Name. 5 When the title block highlights. expand Sheets (all). under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. click Modify. Click OK. For Sheet Number. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. on the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter Site Plan. enter A101. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. enter Freighthouse Flats. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. for Project Address. enter 15 May. under Other. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. enter For Approval. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Number. enter J. enter 2009-1. click Edit. 2009. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . MA 12345 12 Click OK.

196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click.Elevations A107 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Floor Plan. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select A0 metric.Elevations A105 .Elevations A106 . and click OK. and click Save.rvt. and click Rename.Stairs In the following exercise.Sections A108 . you add views to these sheets. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 17 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 . select the new sheet name. for Name. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.

Elevations. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click A102 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . select Level 1. and click to place the view. under Elevations (Building Elevation). The red border around the view no longer displays. click Modify. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet.rvt. and click to place it. 4 On the Design Bar.

11 Under Detail Views (Detail). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).Sections. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Sheets (all).7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . and click to place it.

Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and on the Options Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. .Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 16 Select title bar. for View Scale. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and press TAB until it highlights. and click OK. move the cursor over it. select 1:5. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. zoom in to the grip. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.

Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Stairs. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and click to place it. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. under Sheets (all). click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and click Activate View. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Sections. enter 16700 mm. click Modify. In order to do this. double-click A107 . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and press ENTER.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. 2 Select the building section view.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. and click Deactivate View.rvt. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.6 Right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. After you create the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click North. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You modify the view to hide the view title. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. The camera view displays. Click OK. click Camera.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter T. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. select A0 metric. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. right-click. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. For Sheet Name. double-click Level 1.

under Sheets (all). Under Extents. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click T . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet. enter 100000 mm. enter 18000 mm. For Target Elevation. Click OK.8 On the Options Bar. for Eye Elevation. 14 Under 3D Views. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Under Camera. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. enter 1500 mm. 12 On the View Control Bar.

enter 635 mm. under Graphics. Under Model Crop Size. Click Apply. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter Viewport/no title mark. select Scale (locked proportions). select No. for Height. click Edit/New. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. click Size. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. for Show title. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and then click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. . on the Options Bar. click Modify. click Duplicate.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as doors and windows. click Training Files. 207 . Because of the open style floor plan. such as room and window schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. and click Room and Area. as shown: 5 Using the same method. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify.

and select the room tag. click Training Files. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 16 On the Design Bar. click it. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. indicating that it can be edited. 13 On the Options Bar. click Room. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 14 For Offset. and press ENTER. click OK. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. type 2400 mm. type U18-1. and click to place the room and tag. verify that Tag on placement is selected.rfa. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and the rectangle contains the room tag.

■ 21 On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . type Kitchen. 23 Using the same method. 19 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. type Entry. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. Dining. and press ENTER. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. place rooms and tags. click Room. 22 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2.

but they need to be tagged. expand Lines. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Tag. and moving clockwise. 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. clear Room Separation. click Modify. on the Model Categories tab.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The rooms are already placed. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Floor Plans.

click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.rvt.Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 3 On the Options Bar. in the Project Browser.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

type Building Entry. type Storage. click New.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. for Name. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. select Corridor. next to Rows. For 103. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 105. type Corridor. For 102. for room 101. The room Number is U17-46. For 104. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. select Storage.

In the Lines field. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Visibility. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. select 9. double-click Level 1. For Weight. 4 Click OK twice. type Stair. click Override. click the Color field. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and press ENTER. place rooms from a program list. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and modify room names. click the bright green swatch. 13 Save the file. Under Custom colors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Lines field. In the Line Graphics dialog. you add room separation lines. For Room Separation.■ For 106.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Projection/Surface. and click OK.

click Room Separation. 9 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. draw the horizontal line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify. click Room. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. for Room. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 11 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. 14 For Offset.

click Modify. double-click Level 1. 17 On the Design Bar. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 19 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. under Floor Plans. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). and zoom in to the Corridor. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click OK. 24 Open the Room Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. under Constraints. click Modify. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. under Available fields. while pressing CTRL. (Element Properties). 27 Select Schedule keys.21 On the Options Bar. and for all 3 finishes. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. clear Room Bounding. for Rows. select Rooms. and Wall Finish. 31 For Key Name. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. type As Selected. type Units. click 23 On the Design Bar. click New. select Base Finish. 30 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. for Fields.32 Using the same method. 44 On the Options Bar. for Available fields. select Units. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. under Floor Plans. 38 Under U17-8. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 37 Open the Room Schedule. for Room Style. under Other. 43 In the Filter dialog. 36 Click OK twice. under Identity Data. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . click (Filter Selection). All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. click Check None. select Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. click Edit. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Room Style. 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Add. and click Properties. select Units. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click OK.

3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Color. (Duplicate). 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. at the warning prompt.46 Open the Room Schedule. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. click the Color Scheme field. and 106. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and apply it to the Level 1 view. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. under Views (all). you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click 5 For Title. click OK. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 103. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. under Floor Plans. select Public. for Name. type Room Type. select Service. right-click Level 1. and click Properties. 104. under Graphics. type Room Type. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.rvt. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. 9 In the Project Browser. 48 Save the file. select Room Style.

14 Click OK twice. click Edit. and click OK. click the value in the Color column. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. clear Visible. select Room Type. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Edit Color Scheme. select the color legend. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Schemes. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. and clear Room Separation. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Modify. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . under Visibility. click Color Scheme Legend. expand Lines. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

and click OK.22 In the Color dialog. type 25 mm. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. on the Options Bar. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select blue. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Click OK twice. under Custom color. under Graphics. click Modify. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Size. 24 Click OK. for Swatch Width. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 23 Using the same method. type 5 mm. 28 Under Title Text. (Element Properties). respectively.

Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 35 Click OK twice. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. right-click Building Section. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Sections. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and select Properties. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. click Edit. click Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. under Visibility. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. for Color Scheme. select Room Type. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. under Sections. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. select Rooms. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Section. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view.

select Rooms. click Check None. 45 While pressing CTRL. select Units. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. for Room Style. 41 On the Options Bar. click . 46 Click . select Public. under Identity Data. and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). select all the rooms in the stairwell. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. under Identity Data. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. type Suites. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. excluding the stairwell spaces. click New. 51 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. under Key Name for the new row. for Rows. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . double-click Room Style Schedule. and click . select Service. 54 While pressing CTRL.

but not beyond it. select the room on the left side of the top floor. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. under Volume Computations. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. for Room Style.55 Click . 59 Under Room Area Computation. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. verify that At wall finish is selected. under Identity Data. The color fill will extend to the roof. The color fill extends to the roof. and click OK. and click OK. select Areas and Volumes. select Suites. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 56 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Loft. for Upper Limit. select the stairwell room. and the living room. and click 65 For Limit Offset. the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. 66 Click OK. under Constraints. select Level 2.0. 70 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 On the first level. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . type 0. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 72 On the Design Bar. click Modify. .Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. type -254 mm. 71 Click OK. under Constraints. 68 Click .

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. double-click {3D}. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.73 Save the file.

Select Grand totals.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. under Available fields. click Modify. select Family and Type. select Material: Description. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . and click Add. 9 Using the same method. select Roofs.EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Clear Itemize every instance. click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Category. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .

and click OK twice. and under Fields. type Estimated Cost. under Other. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. 19 For Type. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. click Estimated Cost. and click Add. Under Field formatting. and click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material: Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Material: Cost. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 Click OK. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit. select Currency. 20 For Formula. 17 Click Calculated Value. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. for Fields. for Name. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Calculate totals. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 12 Click OK. select Calculate totals. select Material: Area. under Available fields.40 50. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 23 For Field formatting. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.

In this lesson. 28 For Unit symbol. 31 Save the file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. which inserts commas after every three digits. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. not just for currency. can be used for any number-based parameter. 27 In the Format dialog. tag the line.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. You draw a travel path line. for Rounding. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you create a shared parameter file. for Currency. you create an exiting plan for the building. 26 In the Project Units dialog. 30 Click OK twice. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . either within family components or within the project template. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Digit grouping. select $. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and are defined and stored in an external file. click the Format value. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. adding the shared parameters to a family. and schedule the total distance of each path. and reporting the shared parameters. 29 Select Use digit grouping. regardless of category.

and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create. type Path ID. for Type of Parameter.txt. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. for Name.rvt. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. type Travel Distance. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Length.rvt. 7 Under Parameters. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. click New. for File name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. for Name. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. type Exiting. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

rfa. 11 Click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. type Length. click Add. under Dimensions. under Parameter Data. for Group parameter under. and select Instance.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Load into Projects. for Travel Distance Formula. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . and click OK. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Constraints. following the equals symbol (=). under Parameter Type. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click Select. select Shared parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 14 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 8 Select Instance. click Add. 9 In the Family Types dialog. in the Load into Projects dialog. 15 If necessary. Click Training Files. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Using the same method. group it under Dimensions. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. under Parameters. under Parameters. 13 Click Apply. and click OK. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter.

23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Select. click Label. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.rft. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. select Travel Distance. click Training Files. 24 Click OK twice. under Parameters. click parameter(s) to label). and click OK. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. click Label. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.

33 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 29 In the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. type M_Travel Distance Tag. click Modify. click Load into Projects. 35 Save the file. 32 In the Save As dialog. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. and move it down. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click OK.rvt is selected. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.rfa. for File Name.28 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and click Save.

select Chain.Tagging. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. above the exterior door as shown. and click in the center of the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 6 Move the cursor to the right. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. click Component. under Floor Plans.rvt. After the lines are tagged. 4 On the Options Bar.Placing. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.

Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Tag ➤ By Category.Tagging. move the cursor near the right corner. 13 While pressing CTRL. under Floor Plans. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.7 Move the cursor down.Level 2. for Path ID. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Component. and click (Element Properties). clear Leader. click Modify. double click Exiting Plan . type 1-1. 10 On the Options Bar. through the door. click Modify. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. verify that Chain is selected. Placing. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. and click outside of the building.

click Component. 23 Move the cursor down. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. move the cursor to the left. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.

and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 30 Using the same method. 33 For Name. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . Placing. click Modify.Tagging. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.24 On the Design Bar. 28 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. type Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK. and click OK. type 2-1. under Constraints. click Tag ➤ By Category. for Path ID. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 27 On the Design Bar. . under Category. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.

and click Rename. 42 Click OK. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 36 For Filter by.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Add. select Travel Distance. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. for Filter by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Calculate totals. in the second field. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. under Schedules/Quantities. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 41 Under Fields. for Filter. type 1-. 49 Click OK twice. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 43 In the Project Browser. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields. while pressing CTRL. and under Field formatting. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click Properties. in the third field. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. in the first field.rvt. under Other. 38 For Sort by. and in the third field. and click OK. select contains. type 2-. 50 Save the file.

select the following fields.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .Interiors ➤ C10 .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Fixed Partitions. 10 In the schedule. and select C1010145 . and click . click the Value field. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.152 mm. right-click Generic . click Schedule/Quantities. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click View. click the Fields tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 Under Available fields. and click Properties.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. expand C . and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Assembly Code. under Categories.Partitions . under Identity Data. select Walls. 9 Click OK twice.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb. click the File Data Source tab. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click Training Files.11 Close the exercise file. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 1 On the File menu. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 9 Under Directories. under Database. click Create. 3 Click New. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Next. click OK. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. 11 Click OK 3 times. type Revit_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. the database display may be different than that shown. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.mdb). and click OK to create the database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click Next. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. for Database Name.

These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Additionally. For example. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

262 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. 263 . Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

In the callout view. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. like a standard door header condition. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you trace over the building model geometry. plywood. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. 297 . The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. add detail components. In order to detail from the building model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.

you detail the view of the roof edge. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. The roof overhang detail displays. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. which means that all detail components. They are also view specific. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Exact location is not important. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. double-click the detail callout head. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select As underlay. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.Detailing the View In this exercise. and click Open. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. as well as detail lines. You load detail components. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you add components. 7 In the drawing area. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. region objects. click Training Files.rfa. and insulation objects. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 5 In the alert dialog.

8 Delete the component. 13 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK twice. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Edit/New.5mm. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 17 In the drawing area. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Corrugated Metal. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Repeating Detail. enter 406. Detailing the View | 299 . click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click (Element Properties). 15 For Spacing.

Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 22 On the Options Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Load. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. ■ ■ Click Modify. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. click (Move).20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.

click Training Files. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click Detail Component. you load them as a group from a single file. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.rvt. Detailing the View | 301 . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 31 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 30 In the Type Selector. click OK.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. and click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.

Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. Detailing the View | 303 . click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. enter 140mm. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 42 Click Modify. as shown. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. select to near side. For Offset. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Insulation.

you add lines to your detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.45 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 47 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. they are view specific. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 51 Click Modify. Like detail components.rvt. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Thin Lines. and lock the component.

7 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component.4 Click Modify. and press ENTER. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. enter 10mm. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. For Offset. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . For Offset. select Thin Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. select Medium Lines. as shown. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.

306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. click (Draw). select Chain. and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.

the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select the Penthouse level line. right-click. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. draw the detail lines as shown. select Vapor Barrier. select Do not display. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. and press ENTER. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click OK.18 In the Type Selector. When you turn the display model off. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 24 On the View Control Bar. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 22 In the Project Browser. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . enter 10mm. Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 26 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.

TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . press SPACEBAR as necessary. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes on page 308. select M_Break Line. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. click Detail Component.29 On the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail.

6 Click Modify. click Dimension. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter the text. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.rvt. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click to place the dimension. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 2 On the Options Bar.

right-click. and click Rename. and click OK. and press DELETE. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating Detail Components on page 310. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and save the exercise file. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. click Select All Instances. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. enter Typ. select a text note. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click 6 In the Filter dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.Keynotes. under Text Fields. on the Options Bar. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.7 Select the dimension line. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and click the dimension text. for Suffix. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 14 Click Modify.rft. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 16 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Medium Lines. while pressing CTRL. select all the coping linework. click Training Files. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Open. and selecting the chain. pressing TAB. in the Type Selector.7 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.

18 In the Save As dialog. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for File name. and click OK. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Training Files. select the coping. and the component can be placed in the detail. navigate to your preferred location. and click Open. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 27 On the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. While pressing SHIFT. clear Detail Items. 28 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. you place keynotes on objects. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 In the Filter dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. 26 Press DELETE. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click . click Detail Component. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 31 Using the same method used previously. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.Keynotes view is not the open view. 23 Using a window. 24 On the Options Bar. delete the underlying linework. click Load. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Save. enter Roof Edge. The original linework remains selected. 22 Click Modify. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 21 To place the component. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 30 In the drawing area. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.

5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 2 In the alert dialog. and click Open.rvt. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.D11. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 19mm Plywood. 6 Click Modify. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click OK. Adding Keynotes | 313 . For the metal coping. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. In the Keynotes dialog. click Edit/New. 63mm Rigid Insulation. (Element Properties). Roof Edge4. Click to place the leader arm. use keynote 07645.C1.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. select the metal fascia with drip edge.B5. use keynote 06160. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.

20 Ga. For the 50 x 200. use keynote 06110. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110. select Corrugated Metal. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.A8. use keynote 09250. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Keynote ➤ Element. 15 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to 07645. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. For the 50 x 300. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. using keynote 07460. You do this in order to keynote the component. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 17 Keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click in the Value column. For the 50 x 150. 22mm Corrugated Steel .I1. use keynote 06160. click Detail Component.G1. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.D11. 12 On the Design Bar.F1. use keynote 06110. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. and click . you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.F1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. 24 While pressing CTRL. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. for File name. and click Open. click Duplicate. select Medium Line Detail Component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. click Training Files. 11 Press DELETE. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to your preferred location. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 5 In the drawing area. 16 Select the component. click Load. 13 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. select the left end point of the reference line.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 9 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and click Save. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Edit/New.rft. click Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. and select the right end point. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line.rvt. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . click Load into Projects. and click Modify. and click Open. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Lines. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Training Files.

44 On the Design Bar. and click . click Edit/New. 37 Click OK 3 times. 30 Click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click Modify. enter EPDM Membrane. 49 With the component selected. 29 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. invisible. and assign it keynote 06110.A1.25 Next. 48 Using the same method used previously. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click . You add the components to the project and keynote them. click in the Value column. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. 41 Select the component just added. against the 19mm plywood. and assign it keynote 07260. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 27 On the Design Bar. and click the lower end at the break line. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 28 In the Type Selector. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 31 Select the component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 Using the same method used previously.G1. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 46 Click Modify. and hidden) used in the view. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. name the component Air Barrier. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 38 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 34 In the Name dialog. click (Move). and click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click . 55 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines.

select Invisible Lines. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.58 Using the method used previously. and Vapor Barrier.rfa. click Detail Component. click Keynote ➤ Element. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Load into Projects. 63 In the drawing area. 68 In the drawing area. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 67 In the Type Selector. 61 In the drawing area. 50 x 200 Framing. select the component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. Air Barrier. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rfa. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. in the Type Selector. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 60 On the Design Bar.A4. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Enter 07463. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and assign it keynote 07210. 3 In the text editor. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and close the text editor.. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. under Keynote Table.A9. and press TAB.A4. and press TAB. 72 Save the file.69 Select the component. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and press ENTER. click Browse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and click .A1. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 .rvt. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 71 In the drawing area. add a keynote for the component. 70 Using the method used previously. name the component Batt Insul. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Enter 07460.txt. The database file opens in a text editor. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.

and click to place the note. click to place the leader. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open. select Absolute. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click Keynote ➤ Element. These details do not update with changes to the building model. under Path Type. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 11 Click Modify. and click OK. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 9 In the drawing area. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing .6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.txt. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select all the keynotes. and click OK. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. In the Type Selector. navigate to 07463.A1. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 14 Save the file. 13 Click Modify. After you create a drafting view. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.

For Colors. The detail is imported as an import symbol. select Black and White. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. and click OK. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click Rename. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. for Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.rvt. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Auto . click Training Files.dwg. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Click Open. For Positioning. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.Center to Center is selected. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. right-click Drafting 1. select 1 : 5. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.

No Reference. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the callout. click Edit/New. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. enter Detail . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for New. select Reference other view. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Modify. click Rename. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. click Callout. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. delete the existing value.

under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. and double-click the callout. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. double-click A105 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar./Sect.Elev.No Reference). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Det. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The callout is updated with the sheet information. click Modify.

You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Edit/New. for Name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. . click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Board. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. click Region Properties. 11 In the Name dialog.rvt. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 5 In the Type Selector. click Filled Region. click Duplicate. enter Gyp. and click OK. and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK 3 times. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select Gypsum-Plaster.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click . 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). 18 While pressing CTRL. select Wide Lines. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. 17 Click Modify.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.5mm. click 22 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. click (Draw). select the left and bottom edges of the region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 .

click Region Properties. 30 In the Name dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times.Finish. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Wood . click Filled Region. Move the cursor up.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Duplicate. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Wood . for Name. and click above the top of the region as the end point. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Select the mirrored region. . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 39 In the Type Selector. in the Type Selector.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . verify that the thickness is 19mm. click Filled Region. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Align). click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown.5mm. click . 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Medium Lines. 37 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click (Rectangle). 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Draw a rectangle as shown.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click 48 Click Modify. click Finish Sketch. 47 Click the reference plane. enter 10mm. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. (Align). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset.42 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm. click Filled Region. 46 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset.

Move the cursor left 25mm. Select Chain. enter 0. Move the cursor down 305mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. 54 On the Tools toolbar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. For Offset. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. and press ENTER. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . click Finish Sketch. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor right 25mm.

select the height dimension. click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. top. 65 On the Options Bar. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. 58 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 62 Select the left detail line. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. enter 3mm.2mm. click Detail Lines. 61 Click Modify. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 69 Select the bolt.rfa. click Load. enter 76. For Offset. 68 Click Modify. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Component. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and right edges of the door panel region. 60 Select the left.

select Wide Lines. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. click Load. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. and click Open.70 On the Design Bar.rfa. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. use the images as a guide. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

click . 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 87 Click Modify. 80 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. select Thin Lines. (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 84 On the Design Bar. 85 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. 79 In the Type Selector.78 On the Design Bar.

89 On the Design Bar. 90 In the Type Selector. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. select Medium Lines. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines.

Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 102 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. click Detail Component. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 97 On the Options Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. select M_Break Line. click . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 101 On the Design Bar. 95 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Lines. select the length dimension. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 99 Click Modify.

105 In the drawing area. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. using the Drag Text grip. 107 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. 110 Select the dimension line.5mm Arial. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.

click Dimension. select Replace With Text.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 118 Select Modify to end the command. and enter Varies. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. enter See Schedule. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. and click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A.5mmArial. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . under Dimension Value. and then click the dimension text. 113 Under Text Fields. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 114 Click OK.2. for Below. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.

Board. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 125 In the Options Bar. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click to create an arced leader. and click to place the text. 126 In the drawing area. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.121 Click OK. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 128 Select the note. 123 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. 127 Enter Gyp. click Text.

131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.

339 . The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial.rvt. and double-click East.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . type 1. click Modify. for Number of Leaders. 8 Select the keynote. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Symbol. 7 On the Design Bar.Hexagon. click Training Files. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.rfa. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 5 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Copy). click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag. for Text. Creating a Note Block | 341 . on the Options Bar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy. 12 On the Edit toolbar. under Identity Data. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 17 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. click Copy. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 19 With the tag selected. (Mirror). type B. and click. on the Options Bar.14 With the copy selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type Repair existing door surround. 18 Using the same method. 16 For Tag. click (Element Properties). 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

using the table as a reference. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 22 Optionally. Repair as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Remove all existing windows. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.

for Sort by. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and drag it to the sheet. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. select Center. and click OK. 26 Click OK. and double-click A103 . for Heading. On the Formatting tab. 27 In the column header (text). format. 28 In the Project Browser. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Exterior Construction Notes.Elevations. for Note block name. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. type Description.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Header text. and click Add. type Exterior Construction Notes. under Available fields. On the Appearance tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Text. 29 In the Project Browser. type Mark. type 6 mm. select Tag. select Tag. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. Create. expand Sheets (all). and for Alignment. verify that Arial is selected. for the value. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Add. and select Bold.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.31 On the Design Bar. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. under Sheets (all).rvt.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T .

select does not equal. select Sheet Number. ■ 4 Click OK.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. select Sheet Number. 7 In the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type T. and click Add. The drawing list displays.Title Sheet. On the Filter tab. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Index. double-click T . Select Sheet Name. under Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Filter by. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. under Sheets (all). and in the third field. and click Add. in the first field. for Sort by.

door frame schedule. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. Training File Using Legends | 347 . you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. click Modify. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 11 Save the file. On construction documents. and door frames. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. doors. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Finally. windows. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. For the text. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. and so on). building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.

you create a text type with the necessary size. for Name.rvt. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Open Level Head . 10 For Text Size.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type Typical Symbol Legend. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 9 For Text Font. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Arial. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type Legend Text. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. for Name. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Symbol.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK twice.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . type 3mm. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click to place it. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. expand Sheets (all). 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected. expand Legends.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Typical Symbol Legend.Site Plan/Floor Plan. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and for Leader. 16 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector. 23 Save the file. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.17 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 .Unit 18. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. under Sheets. and click to place it. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

type 900 mm.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. for Name. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For View. select Section. click Legend Component. and press ENTER. select Medium for Detail Level. For Host length. 3 For Scale. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 5 On the View Control Bar. select 1 : 50. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

for Family. and on the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader. 10 Select the second wall.9 On the Design Bar. click Text. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click Modify. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 13 On the Options Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.

and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and drag it to the new sheet. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Level 4. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. right-click Sheets (all). and click New Sheet. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . The text note with leader is added to the legend. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.

29 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible. drag it onto the sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4. under Legends. click Modify to end the command. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 26 On the Design Bar. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser.25 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.

Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Select the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 35 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Creating a Component Legend | 355 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. select the Wall Type 2 component. select Detail Level: Medium. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view.

contractor inquiries. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. double-click Level 4. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. In this exercise. click 37 Save the file. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Using the table. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.36 Optionally. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.

For example. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 7 Under Show. verify that Per Project is selected. If you select Per Sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 .2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. yet as concise as possible. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In most instances. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. type a date. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. If Visible is not selected. for Numbering. if the active revision is number 1. 5 For Description. In general. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When you use this option. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. When Issued is selected.

9 Save the file.rvt. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 5 Select the divider. including revision number and revision date. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click (Move). 6 On the Design Bar. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. you make changes to the project floor plan. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 Select the divider. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Revision clouds have read-only properties. move the cursor up. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4.

click Revision Cloud. In the Snaps dialog. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . select Snaps Off. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.

and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. select 6. you load a revision tag into the project. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Line Weight. 17 Save the file. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. you need to add one.rfa. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. and because the revision is the first in the project. click Tag ➤ By Category. 11 Click to place the tag. You then issue a revision. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Tags.rvt. 12 Save the file. 4 On the Options Bar. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 10 In the drawing area. 5 In the Tags dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 6 Click Load. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files.

6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You can continue to add revisions. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 8 Add another revision row. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You do this by issuing the revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 7 For Description. under Sheets.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click OK. and enter a date for the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you prevent further changes to the revision. type Modify Paving Area. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and enter a date. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. and click OK.rvt. with the description Relocate Door. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. double-click A107 . After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. select Issued. NOTE After you issue a revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you can no longer modify it.

Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. Working with Revisions | 363 . 13 Click Finish Sketch. select the revision cloud. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 12 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. in the drawing area. 19 To add tags. select Revision Cloud.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. for Revision. 3 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select Tag ➤ By Category. select Seq. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 15 On the Options Bar.Modify Paving Area. 2 . apply Seq.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 20 On the Project Browser. double-click A107 . click to add a revision clouds.Unnamed. under Sheets (all). Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. double-click Level 4.

Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. you edit the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 25 Click OK twice. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. For each revision. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Click Options. clear Issued. for Numbering. select the titleblock.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. height. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Alphabetic. for Sequence. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. delete the first 3 characters. and rotation) to the revision schedule. beginning with "D".

Select Grid lines. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and press DELETE. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. under Other. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and drag it above the schedule area. click Load into Projects. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 33 Select the schedule header. click Edit. right-click Revision Schedule. select Bottom-up.27 On the Options Bar. Clear Blank row before data. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Modify. for Appearance. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 34 On the Design Bar. Working with Revisions | 365 . click Yes. for Build Schedule. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Select Outline. and click Properties. click Edit Family. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the alert dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Yes.

Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and click Properties.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 46 Click OK twice. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. under Other. for Height. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. and on the Options Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area.. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 45 On the Appearance tab. With a user-defined height. enter Rev. open the titleblock family for editing. click Edit. When the height property is variable. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Formatting. 40 Select the revision schedule header. for Rotation on Sheet. select the revision schedule. select User defined. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Heading. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser.

and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . text. you learn to import information (such as images. click Load into Projects.

1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.JPG. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.rvt.rvt. double-click T .Title Sheet. click Training Files. under Sheets. click to add text without a leader. click Text. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and place it on a sheet. double-click T . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Leader. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets.Importing Image Files In this exercise.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.

7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Modify. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 6 Select the text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file. with the new text box still selected.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.

This step has been completed for you. click Desktop. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify.mdi. 4 Under Printer. click File menu ➤ Print. and saved as Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. under Sheets. double-click A102 . NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system to system. click Training Files.rvt. 10 On the Design Bar. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.JPG. 3 In Microsoft Excel.JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Save the file.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Fixture Schedule.xls. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. for File name. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. for Name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. and click Save.

called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. or footprint. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 371 . The large floor plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. for Name. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 6 In the drawing area. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. The dependent view opens. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. under Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. enter Level 2 . and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar.Aviary.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

11 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Level 2. and click OK. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and on the Zoom flyout. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Name.Labs. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.10 Click in the drawing area. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click Modify. under Floor Plans. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 20 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 18 On the Design Bar.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.

34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 28 For Line Pattern. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . expand Sheets. and click OK. for Name. select 9. and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. click Level 2 . right-click A101 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 33 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. 31 In the Project Browser.Aviary. under Floor Plans. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Under Matchline.Unnamed. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Double Dash. and click Rename.

40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click View Reference. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 39 On the Options Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Aviary is selected. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Target view.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.Labs. for Target view. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .

after modifying the annotation crop region. click (Show Crop Region). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.46 In the Project Browser. 48 Select the crop region. 49 If. 47 On the View Control Bar. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. right-click. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. double-click Level 2 . and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. under Floor Plans. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.Aviary. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click OK. 51 On the View Control Bar. 52 In the Project Browser. expand Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . but are not placed on sheets. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 55 On the Zoom flyout. select all views in the list. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and click Apply Dependent Views. 54 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2.

384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation.

for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. right-click South Elevation.Right. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Rename. expand South Elevation. and click Rename. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. enter South Elevation . and drag it toward the center of the view. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation .Left. for Name. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.The dependent view opens. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 3 In the Project Browser. select the Crop Region. 5 In the drawing area. 11 Select the crop region. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 .

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 On the Design Bar.

Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. The perspective view displays. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.

Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. double-click Site. and click Show Camera. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. With the camera shown. and select the crop boundary. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. and adjust the field of vision.3 Zoom out. Depending on camera placement. under Floor Plans. If the camera is not shown in the view. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. right-click 3D View 1. in the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as shown.

and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. double-click Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog.Day. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file. enter Exterior . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. under 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser.6 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. under 3D Views. You then duplicate the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior.rvt.Day. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. modify render settings.

select Edit/New. 5 In the Rename dialog. for Setting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Medium. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Spring Equinox. select Sky: Cloudy. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 3 In the Rendering dialog.Santa Monica. and click Render. 7 In the Rendering dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 3pm. You create a location and time for the rendering. You adjust cloud settings as required. NOTE If a background image is required. under Lighting.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for New. 8 Under Quality. In this case. and click Rename. 6 Click OK twice. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Spring Equinox . for Sun. under Background.

click Show the model. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Export.9 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop.png). Click Save. For Files of type. After the image is rendered. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.

22 Using the same method. and select the last light.Flat Round : 60W . click OK. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Day view to Exterior . enter Pool House Lights. select the first light. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. dialog.Night. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. press and hold SHIFT. under Ungrouped Lights. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . click New.Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . enter Pool Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. under Group Options. and click OK.120V to the Pool Lights group.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .120V. on the View Control Bar. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. under Group Options. under Lighting. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night. verify that Pool Lights is selected. for Name. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. 27 In the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Artificial Lights. right-click Exterior .Day. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 16 With the Exterior . under 3D Views. To select a sequential list. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. and click OK. and click OK.Flat Round : 60W . and click Move to Group.Night view open. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. click Render. 25 Using the same method. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . select Exterior: Artificial only. click Dialog). 19 In the New Light Group dialog. for Name.Flat Round : 60W .Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. click New.

33 Proceed to the next lesson. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. In this example. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. and click OK. 30 In the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. click Show the model. under Image. 32 Save the file.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. for Exposure Value. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. enter 4. After the image is rendered. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Rendering an Interior View on page 411.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise.

but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 6 Select the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. and place the component inside the pool house. the person’s line of sight. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. ■ (Rotate). double-click Level 1. select RPC Female : YinYin. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. click Component. and on the Edit toolbar. Adding RPC People | 413 .

13 On the Design Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Cast Reflections. click Edit. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 12 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click (Element Properties).■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. you can enable this option. for Render Appearance Properties. under Parameters. By default. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click Modify. In order to see the figure’s reflection. on the Options Bar. 14 Save the file.

You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .The perspective view displays. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under Extents. and click OK. select Section Box. under 3D Views.

under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 .7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Elevations (Building Elevations). double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South. select the section box. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. in addition to the 3D view. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view.

418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.

Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 17 Save the file. and curtain walls. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. To create a daytime view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 .

click Render. right-click 3D View 1. you turn them off for this scene.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. clear Pool Lights. You can specify a lower quality. for Scheme. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. and click OK. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. and click OK. 5 Click Artificial Lights. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. under 3D Views. select Interior: Artificial only. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. under Lighting. 8 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. select Draft. enter Interior . 7 Under Quality. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. After these settings are established.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 2 In the Rename View dialog.Night. and click Rename.

By default they are turned off. click 14 For Setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . you must create a custom setting.Santa Monica. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. but the space will receive standard daylighting. for Scheme. 13 In the Rendering dialog.9 Close the Rendering dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . and click OK. select Curtain Walls. In this case. For more information on daylight portals.Night. select Spring Equinox . for Sun. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. You create a view for the interior during the day. right-click Interior . 17 In the Rendering dialog. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. For sunlit interiors. select Edit. select Region.Day. 3pm. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. for Daylight Portal Options. select Interior: Sun only. click Copy To Custom. and click Render. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. (Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. The preset schemes are read-only.

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and on the Options Bar. 20 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. click Properties). Click OK. and close the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. under Image. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. enter 1. click Adjust Exposure. In the next steps. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 10.

select Wood. select High. For Bump. For Amount. select Printer. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and on the Options Bar. enter 90.6. for Setting. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Scale (locked proportions). enter 5''. You change the varnish setting. click the dimensions for Size.22 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Region. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. and click Render. For Rotate. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. As size and DPI are increased. 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Resolution. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. For Width. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select the crop boundary. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click OK. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 26 Click Update Preview. 30 In the drawing area. under Output Settings. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . select Unfinished. Click OK. 23 With the column still selected. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Based on wood grain. add a bump map to create texture. the render time increases significantly. and click OK.

You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. elevation. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. or section view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. In a plan view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. independent of the Revit Architecture software. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. but you can also define it in a 3D. The walkthrough path is a spline. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI.The rendered image displays.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. If you prefer to use metric values. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and click the tab in the context menu. click Training Files. and double-click 1st Floor. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and change unit formats as desired. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. proceeds through the dining room.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Perspective is selected.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar.

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish.

enter 9''. If it is not. click the dimensions for Size. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 1. select the crop boundary. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify that Field of view is selected. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 14 Click . 17 Click . and click OK. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and select the crop boundary. and click OK. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . click Edit Walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. for Width. 13 On the Options Bar. for Frame. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 11 Under Change. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. enter 16''. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and for Height.

double-click 1st Floor. click (Element Properties).rvt. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. c_Townhouse. clear Far Clip Active. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. proceed to the next exercise. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. under Floor Plans. click Edit Walkthrough. press ESC.The walkthrough plays. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. select Path. for Controls. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.

reducing the size of the image. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and click OK. or rendering. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. for Compressor. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. If you are unsure of what option to use. shading. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. on the Options Bar. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 3 Under Format. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. double-click Walkthrough 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. select <Shading>. shading with edges. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. enter 15. When you export the walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. click Edit Walkthrough. for Model Graphics Style. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. hidden line. for Frames/sec. c_Townhouse.rvt. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. . and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. under Walkthroughs. and click OK. under Output Length. specifying the number of frames. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. The walkthrough is recorded. and click Save. 9 To play the walkthrough. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click File menu ➤ Save As.

Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. More specifically. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. In this tutorial. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. 431 . you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.

rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. as shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click shown.Creating a Solar Study . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and double-click 01 Entry. (SteeringWheels). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Camera. A 3D view is created.

Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. click Section. click Modify. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.Courtyard View. if necessary. 3 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. as shown. you create a section cutaway view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. right-click 3D View 1. click Save As. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand 3D Views. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. enter Solar Study . 8 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the File menu.

as shown. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway.5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 To view the section. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Section 1. click Modify. and click Rename. click 10 On the View toolbar. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. expand Sections. double-click the section head. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click . (SteeringWheels). click Modify. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Rename View dialog. then Fine. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 18 On the File menu.14 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. double-click 01 Entry. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. click . so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. under 3D Views. 6 In the Rename View dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 17 To hide the section box. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. then select Medium. 16 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. as shown. and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . Typical plan views. click Callout. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. In some cases. do not display many elements in 3D. you create a plan cutaway view. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and click OK. click Save. under Floor Plans.

436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 15 Select the Roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click (SteeringWheels). 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. so you can see into the building from the top. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown.8 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. as shown. click Modify.

and click Rename. right-click {3D}. 21 On the File menu.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . under 3D Views.

5 Click the Single-Day tab. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. CA. You can create a still. For this study. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. For the Multi-Day solar study. date. for City. MA. USA is selected. and click OK. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA.Boston. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Los Angeles. select Los Angeles.Creating Solar Studies . expand 3D Views. and time range. 4 For Sun Position. you specify the location. click . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. or multi-day solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. 9 In the Name dialog. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 10 Under Place. click . leave the slider at 50. click click OK. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. you specify the location. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. date range. and time. Click the Single-Day tab. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. enter Summer Solstice. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . . expand Views (all). For the Single-Day solar study. and click Duplicate. 3 Select Cast Shadows. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . single-day.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . enter Winter Solstice. enter 10 and press ENTER. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. select June 22. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . ■ For Time Interval. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. for Sun Position. Los Angeles. 2008. 19 On the File menu. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . and click OK. Los Angeles. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 20 and press ENTER. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. on the Single-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Save.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Time Range. click . and click Duplicate. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 14 In this case. select December 22. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Frame. for Date. click OK. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles is selected. Under Frame. 2008.

approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. for Sun Position. click . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK.■ To display the next key frame. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. The solar study animation plays. 13 On the View Control Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. click Text. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click . . . double-click 01 Entry. click To display the next sequential frame. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Los Angeles. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 On the Options Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. expand 3D Views. as shown. click . Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click Lines. Click and enter Dining. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. approximately as shown. click . verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. On the Options Bar. 8 For Sun Position. 5 In the Project Browser. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

select the section box. select Summer Solstice. click OK. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 11 To display the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 12 In the drawing area. and enter 5 to 50. and click OK. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. as shown. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 Click outside of the section box. if necessary. Los Angeles. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. ■ For Frames per second. clear Section Boxes.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Frame Range. select Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Output Length.

2 On the View Control Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Format. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and enter 5 to 10. Los Angeles. for Model Graphics Style. click . and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. on the Single-Day tab. Click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Files of Type.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. verify that the value is set to 15. select Frame Range. For File Name.■ ■ Under Format. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. To view the animation. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . or frame. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. you open each image. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and click OK. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . of the animation separately. select AVI Files. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. For Dimensions. select Winter Solstice. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Compressor. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. enter 450 in the first field (width). 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click OK. 3 For Sun Position.Los Angeles. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Output Length. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. For Frames per second. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.

8 Click Save.■ For Dimensions. click the Desktop icon. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. For Files of Type. In this example. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. or any single-frame format. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For File name. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.Los Angeles. BMP. click Save. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. or GIF. such as JPEG. TIFF. as shown: 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . under 3D Views. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. depending on the Frame Range. select PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. enter 450 in the first field (width). Click OK. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. and click Duplicate. click the Multi-Day tab.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. and click OK. For Time. for Sun Position. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 5 Select the roof. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. select One week.Los Angeles . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . click OK. clear Section Boxes. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for File name enter 2pm . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. For Time Interval. 8 On the View Control Bar. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. specify 2:00 pm. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.Week Interval. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and on the View Control Bar.Boston. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. USA. MA. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

When you mirror a project. and click OK. you mirror all model elements. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. such as East . for File Name. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . 17 On the View Control Bar. model views. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). for Compressor. In the Length/Format dialog. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and annotations in non-drafting views. click OK. Click the Desktop icon.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry.West or North . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. under Floor Plans.South. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. and click Save.

West. The project is mirrored along the East . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.West axis. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. 6 On the Standard toolbar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. right-click. For additional information. select the roof. 5 In the warning dialog. select East . 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise. and click OK. Then. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click OK. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.

click . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 10 Under Date and Time. specify 11:00 AM for time. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. and click OK. 8 For Sun Position. Orienting to True North | 449 . click Apply. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. select Cast Shadows. select Summer Solstice. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and click OK. 5 For Sun Position. For example. 11 For Sun Position. on the Still tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 12 Under Date and Time. click . click the Still tab. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.3 On the View Control Bar.

the view settings must be set for True North. click . When a project is started. and select Winter Solstice. 18 In the Project Browser. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. right click 01 Entry. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 15 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. under Floor Plans. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. for Orientation. double-click 01 Entry. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select True North. click OK. and click Properties. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

The floor plan rotates in the view. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . click toward the top of the screen. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. as shown.■ To establish the True North direction.

for Orientation. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. under 3D Views. click . 27 In the Rename View dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. select True North. right-click 01 Entry. and click Rename. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. select Project North. 32 On the View Control Bar. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click OK. click the Still tab.23 In the Project Browser. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. right-click. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Apply. 33 For Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select True North Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. 28 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. enter True North Orientation. for Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.

In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. Click OK. click Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab. click the Desktop icon. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. for Compressor. enter 600 in the first field. Los Angeles. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For File Name. In the Length/Format dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Orienting to True North | 453 . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for Dimensions. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Click Save. For Files of Type. under Format. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.

select Medium. Under Lighting. select 12/22. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. This would include some exterior views and most interior views.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Sun.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In the Name dialog. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select Edit/New. under Quality. for Setting. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. select Interior: Sun only. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Scheme. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and 2:00 PM. 2 In the Project Browser. Rendered views do not have this limitation. under 3D Views. capturing it. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Date and Time. and click Duplicate. (Show Rendering Dialog). click Render. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and exporting it as a JPEG image. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK. under Settings. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Since a rendered image is temporary. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. under 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.

verify that JPEG Files is selected. enter living area_winter solstice. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. For Files of type.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project. click Export. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. and click OK. and click Save. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Desktop. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 7 In the Save To Project dialog.

456 .

an outside reviewer. They include rendering. and details. For the realistic approach. advanced model graphics. 457 . and section boxes. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. When organizing presentation graphics. you can choose between realism and stylistics. however. elevations. type. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Other tools in the software. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. In this tutorial. you explore the stylistic approach. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Using the pre-built building model. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. a consultant. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. sections. Whether the audience is the general contractor. or the client. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. length. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. In this series of exercises. Co-house.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. linework.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. right-click 2nd Flr. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. click Training Files. click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.rvt. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Floor Plans. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click Rename.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and other annotations in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand the Stairs category. 7 Under Visibility. and clear DOWN Text. No annotations display in the view. click the Annotation Categories tab. dimensions. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Save As directory. and Up Arrow. 8 Click OK. this represents the view getting smaller. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. UP Text. sections. This turns off the visibility of all tags. elevations. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Down Arrow. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Date and Time. NOTE For this step. and select 1st Flr. click the Place tab. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 1:00 PM. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. click OK. the darker the shadows. MA. 6 Under Settings. 7 For Place. click . click . click (Shadows Off). NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. Cnst. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Sun and Shadow Settings. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. you can select any city. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . Within a project. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Time and Place. At that place. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world.rvt. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Sun Position. specify 10/27. If you select a different city. 9 For City. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 3 On the View Control Bar. you can create. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. on the Still tab. The higher the number. select Boston. 12 Click OK. ■ For Contrast. select By Date. however. specify 35. and click OK. select Cast Shadows.

462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. . 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. clear Ground Plane at Level. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click (Shadows On).Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. under Settings. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click OK. click OK.

click Add View. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the View tab is not available. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click to place it. and click OK. click Sheet. and click View. 4 In the Views dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . right-click the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. and notice the view title.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. select Arch Portrait.

To accomplish this. click OK. For this analytique. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. under Graphics. and click Activate View. for Show Title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 12 In the Name dialog. select No. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click Duplicate. click . click Edit/New. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. The viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 18 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. fill properties. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. If necessary. When you finish drawing the chain. click Edit/New. 20 On the Options Bar. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 17 In the Type Selector. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. select Invisible lines. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and select Chain. click Region Properties. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . and the boundary of the region. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click . 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . scroll down. enter Presentation. click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. select Solid fill. enter Solid Black. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. for Fill Pattern.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. and click Deactivate View. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Name. under Graphics. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. under Identity Data. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Sheet Name. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. and click View Properties. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. click Duplicate.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. right-click South. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .

on the Model Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click in the Walls row. click . click Duplicate. scroll up. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click OK. 9 Click OK. clear Visible. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar. under Visibility. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Copy of South. enter Presentation South Elevation. By changing the angle of the sun. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. select Cast Shadows. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Time and Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. specify 2:30 PM. expand the Doors category. and click Rename. 12 Under Shadow. and click OK. select By Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Pattern Overrides. click (Shadows Off). This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 14 For Sun Position. and click OK. under Elevations. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click in the drawing area. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. exit the menu. under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. specify 35. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. under Settings. 13 For Contrast. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 18 For Time.2 In the Project Browser. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Override.

under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.Presentation. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 .

5 In the Type Selector.The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.

for Scale. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1: 100. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. click Section. double-click 1st Flr. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Cnst. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.

and double-click Section 2. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. as shown. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100. for Scale.Section 2 is added to the building model. To fit correctly in the analytique. this view needs to be rotated 180°. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. 7 On the Options Bar.

This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click OK. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. expand the Doors category. and clear Elevation Swing. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 2. click Override. 15 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Walls row. click Modify. 11 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click OK. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. under Pattern Overrides. 17 Under Visibility. clear Visible.

(Hide Crop Region). This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 20 Click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. When you select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display. 22 On the View Control Bar. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Duplicate. Click Apply. and click Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). The shadows do not offer much contrast. in the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. under Sections (Callout 1). specify the following: Under Shadow. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . ■ For Sun Position. For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 6 In the Name dialog. specify 35. In addition. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the steps that follow. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar.

TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . For Azimuth. Select Relative to View. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Altitude. and click OK. select Directly. specify 135°. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Silhouette style. Silhouette Edges. NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. click OK. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. specify 70°.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Click OK. was added to this training file for training purposes. select Silhouette Edges. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar.

and click to place the selected view. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. double-click A105 . click Add View. under Sheets (all).Presentation. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

In the steps that follow. 6 On the Design Bar. and press Enter. double-click Section 2. select Viewport : Presentation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . To rotate an object. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. click Modify. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. under Sections (Callout 1). The view title no longer displays. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius.5 In the Type Selector. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. Using a clock as a reference. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout.

The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 .The callout rotates 180°. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport.

under Sections (Type 1). Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Rename.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the View Templates dialog. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. double-click Presentation Section 2. click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New View Template dialog. right-click Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. enter Presentation. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK.rvt. 7 In the Rename View dialog. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Copy of Section 1.

14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select 90° Counterclockwise. under Names. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click OK. for Rotation on Sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. 15 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics.Presentation. click Add View. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lighting fixtures. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 1. select Viewport : Presentation. annotations. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. The furniture. select Presentation. double-click A105 .

In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484.

click Modify. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the callout. as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Callout. After you add the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.

under Extents. double-click Presentation Callout. and click OK. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. 7 Select the crop region.5 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. clear Annotation Crop. enter Presentation Callout.

click Modify. select Section: Presentation Callout. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Add View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. Click OK. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. specify 22. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Activate View.Presentation. 15 On the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . For Scale Value 1. select Custom. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

double-click Presentation Callout. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Right-click the callout presentation view. click Edit/New. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. activate the viewport. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When finished. In the steps that follow. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. and make adjustments as necessary. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and move it to the position shown below. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.

Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. on the Design Bar. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. under Sheets (all).Presentation. and click Activate View. double-click A105 . You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 28 In the Project Browser. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. select Solid fill. and click OK 3 times. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. for Fill Pattern. When you are finished. click . click Filled Region. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .25 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Finish Sketch.

32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region. click .31 On the Options Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region). 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click Finish Sketch. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

click (Hide Crop Region). 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). double-click Isometric. and click 1 : 200. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. and apply shadows to the views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click the Scale control. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. enter Isometric 2. and click Rename. Select 1st Flr. double-click Isometric 2. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Directly. select Section Box. in the list. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Silhouette style.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Sun Position. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. Click OK. enter Isometric 1. and click Rename. specify 35. For Contrast. A section box displays around the building model. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. under Extents. 8 In the Name dialog. For Azimuth. 13 In the Project Browser. For Altitude. and click OK. specify 45°. specify 135°. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. Select Ground Plane at Level. click Duplicate. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 12 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Select Relative to View. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. and click OK. Cnst. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. You can use this to rotate the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. as shown. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box.19 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.

drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. 22 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 29 To hide the section box. under Sheets (all). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. If desired. Next. select Viewport : Presentation. clear Section Boxes.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog.Presentation. double-click Isometric 3. The section box no longer displays. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 27 Select the section box. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and click Rename. click Modify on the Design Bar. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 3. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. you can adjust the plane location. 25 To hide the section box. make a copy of the view. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . clear Section Boxes. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser.

You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation.32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector.

click Edit. 36 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 39 For Background. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 42 Using the drawing tools. On the Options Bar. for Fill Patterns. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . select Concrete.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit/New. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 41 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select Transparent. This will make it easier to draw lines. and click Activate View. 35 Select the poche filled region.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View.43 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. for Fill Pattern. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. 46 Click OK twice. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.

3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. click Camera. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. then you specify the eye direction and range.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. a cutaway perspective view. you create the final view for the analytique. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. The view opens immediately.rvt. double-click 1st Flr.

select Silhouette Edges. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click . and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. for Silhouette style.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Contrast. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. under Extents. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . select Section Box. A section box now cuts through the building model. Grips display on each plane of the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

Presentation. In the Type Selector. click (Hide Crop Region). select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. 18 On the View Control Bar. under Change. 21 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. enter 165 mm. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. 17 Under Model Crop Size. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport : Presentation.14 Select the crop region. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. for Width. under Sheets (all). you must specify the actual size of the image. click Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 19 To hide the section box. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown.

click Edit/New. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Title. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 6 mm. 10 In the Name dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click . and click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. click OK. under Text. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . select the same font as the title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. specify a text size of 40 mm. select Text : Title. click Text.rvt. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select a font. double-click it in the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Description. under Text. Annotating the Analytique on page 503.Presentation sheet is not the active view.

16 In the Type Selector. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Modify.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

In this tutorial. and roofs. curtain walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. that compose the building. Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. 507 .

buildings. click Create Mass. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. and click Save. select Auto-Detect. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. select Preserve. 9 In the informational dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 4 In the New Project dialog. select All. click OK. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. click OK. Double-click the Common folder. For Layers. For Import units. or select from a list. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog.rte. For Colors. and click OK.skp. Click the Sketchup file. right-click in the Design Bar. select SketchUp Files. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Browse. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. enter Import SketchUp. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Files of type. for File name. enter SketchUp Model. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. under Template file. you create a Revit Architecture project.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. click the Massing tab. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and not in the library. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. visible elements. click Training Files. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

Level 1 is the only choice. In a new project. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. curtain walls. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan.Center. select Level 1. select Manual . 14 On the View toolbar. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. and roofs. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click Finish Mass. ■ ■ For Positioning. 16 On the Design Bar. Click Open. click the Close button. click . depending on the complexity of the project. such as walls. For Place at level. 17 In the warning dialog. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.

and on the View Control Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and roofs. for Level. 3 In the Type Selector. such as walls. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. curtain walls. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. that compose the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.400mm displays. After you create the building from the mass faces. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise.18 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. click Roof by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the face so that it highlights in red. 4 On the Options Bar.

Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. on the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 9 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. To see the new roof. click to display masses. click Create Roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. on the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 14 On the Options Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 16 On the View toolbar.15 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 22 In the Type Selector. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . for Loc Line. 21 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify to end the command. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 23 On the Options Bar.

514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. 28 In the Type Selector.

30 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same technique. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. 32 On the View toolbar.

38 Select the mass face shown below. click Create System. click Wall by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. select the other wall. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and select it. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Curtain System. and on the Options Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights.35 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. and on the Options Bar.

specify a point to place the camera. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click Wall by Face. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera. double-click Level 1. and select the mass face shown below. click to view the building that you have created. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Below the right corner of the view.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 42 On the View toolbar.

The perspective view created by the camera displays. as shown. click your building in the view. specify a point for the camera target. roofs. Click the frame to display its grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. 48 On the View toolbar. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. to view only the walls.

Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click Modify. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Click OK. and select the left curtain system in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification. click .Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. select Center. Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . select Center.

verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. double-click {3D}. 55 Right-click. 63 In the Type Selector. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Door. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 59 On the View toolbar. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. and move the roof edges as shown below. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.54 Select each roof to display its grips. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you need to change the length of the wall. to resize the system. To change grids. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 525 . grid lines. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. you select the grid. To switch panel types. Like windows. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This affects the entire curtain system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you need to select a panel. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. and mullions. panel. you create a curtain system using the wall command. For example. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. and they are not windows. and you can change these elements individually. Unlike windows.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls.

click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall.

expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.11 Select the curtain system. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. using curtain grids. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and room bounding. and click (Properties). Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. Click OK. enter 1200. top constraint. For Top Offset. top and base attachments.

25 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. right-click Elevation 1 . 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Creating an Entrance | 529 . double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. click Modify.a. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. click Curtain Grid. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK.

29 In the Select Levels dialog. click Curtain Grid. Click to create a vertical grid. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. select SECOND FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select the 3 grid lines you just placed. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. THIRD FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. FOURTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to place another grid line. click Modify. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.

The segment line style changes to dashed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then select the segment above it. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.Next. click Add or Remove Segments. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 531 . you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed.

41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. and lock them.38 Using the same method. select One Segment. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

Use the following image as a guide. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click in any white space to exit the editor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 43 Delete the dimensions. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them.

Now. 52 On the Type Selector. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. These panels schedule as doors. The panel changes to a double door. 56 In the Project Browser. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click view. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. and click Wireframe. . under Floor Plans. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. double-click Entrance Elevation. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. They are part of the curtain panel category. 57 On the View Control Bar. on the new curtain system you added.rfa. not as curtain panels. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 55 In the Project Browser.Next. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click Modify. click Training Files. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 54 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click System Panel : Solid. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. and the solid panels display in white. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 65 On the View Control Bar. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 61 With the panel still selected. click . Creating an Entrance | 535 .

select Grid Line Segment. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.68 On the File menu. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 4 On the Options Bar. click Mullion. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. select Entire Grid Line. click Save As.rvt. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

however. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 Delete the mullions below them. select All Empty Segments. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.6 On the Options Bar. so you remove them next. clickModify. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are a few that you do not want. because their width reduces the size of the doors.

This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. double-click Southeast Isometric. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 14 Click the top mullion control. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 17 Save the file. you can also right-click. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. click Modify. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Finally.Two mullion join controls display. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Curved Curtain System | 539 . click Wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Finally. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. enter 1200. you add a curtain system using the wall command. under Floor Plans. For Top Offset. for Top Constraint. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points).

10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. you place grids on the system. Next. click Curtain Grid. eighths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Divide the halves into quarters. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. and then sixteenths. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You are going to use one of these snaps points. double-click East. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 14 In the Project Browser.

Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 18 In the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. 16 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select Basic Wall: Generic . Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you change some panels in the system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. click Modify. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system.300mm. Next. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . to filter out all 19 Save the file.

8 On the Design Bar. click . 12 On the Options Bar. . 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser.rft. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 11 On the Design Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. clear Chain. enter 100. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Glass. click Model Lines. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. and on the Options Bar. for Depth. double-click Exterior. and click . under Elevations. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. and click OK. click Lines.

19 In the Project Browser. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .Pattern. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 23 Right-click.Pattern.rfa family. All fourth floor panels are selected. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. click (Default 3D View). right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. (SteeringWheels). 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and click Change Walls Orientation. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar.Pattern. under Floor Plans. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click Modify. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 21 In the Type Selector.14 On the Design Bar. 24 On the View toolbar. and return to the project file. and save the family as Curtain Panel .rfa.

27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select System Panel .Solid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The finished arc wall should look like the following image. All fifth floor panels are selected. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 29 In the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 30 Save the file. right-click.

double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Training Files. under Elevations. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. . and click OK. For vertical mullions. click Lines. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Select Radius. 8 On the Design Bar. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click ■ ■ For Sides. Click again to specify the ending point. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Mullion. and select it.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. for Profile Usage.

and return to the project file. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.detail. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 On the View toolbar.rfa family. click Detail Component. and click Visibility. 27 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click (SteeringWheels). clear Fine. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Mullion. it can be added as a mullion type. click Training Files. click Visibility. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Select the detail component. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. After the new profile is loaded. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under 3D Views.rfa. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. clear Coarse and Medium.rfa. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 31 Click .

and click OK. so you remove the unwanted ones. under Floor Plans. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 Click Edit/New. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. You have placed more mullions than you want. for Profile. 38 On the Options Bar. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. right-click. 44 Save the file. 36 Under Construction. 37 Click OK twice. 40 On the Design Bar. 41 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. select All Empty Segments. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . click Duplicate.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Circular Mullion for Family. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 43 Press DELETE.

All the inside faces highlight. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and you can click to select them all. you learned to create a curved curtain system. under Floor Plans. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and then apply those custom elements to the system. a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Defines slope. click Pick Walls.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. TIP To chain select all the walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and a ruled curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. and press TAB. In this lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 11 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 600. 10 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. click Finish Roof. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.7 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 18 Save the file. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. select Entire Grid Line. click Roof Properties. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. double-click Southeast Isometric. Sloped Glazings | 549 . click Modify.

click Wall. 5 On the Options Bar. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 4 In the Type Selector. and enter 2400. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Unconnected for Height. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.Storefront System In this exercise. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

and press ENTER. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. Storefront System | 551 . click Edit/New. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 In the Project Browser. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. which is specified in the type. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. under 3D Views. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . This specifies an exact length for the wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. enter 10200 mm. even if the wall height changes. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 9 On the Design Bar. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. To see how the grid layout is defined. click Modify. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. For this wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm.

and Offset. see the Revit Architecture help. Angle. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. select All Empty Segments. 19 Select a curtain grid. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Justification. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. center. enter 15. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 18 On the Options Bar. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 20 Save the file. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. or end. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. In this exercise.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. By setting the Angle value. 16 Click OK. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. you find Number. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 .

you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.8 Select the highlighted line. 11 Click OK. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 9 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click . Next. click Modify. 10 Select the panel.

and then eighths. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters. Finally. right-click. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and then eighths. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 16 In the Type Selector. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. quarters. 18 Save the file. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.

556 .

and low sloped roofs. In this lesson. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Before you can sketch the roof profile. shed. including hip. 557 . you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and soffits to the roofs that you create. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.Roofs 15 In this lesson. You do not need to create the work plane. gutters. gable. you learn how to add fascia. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial. mansard. In addition. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise.

TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and double-click Level 1. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and click OK. click the blue square on the witness line. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click Training Files. and so on). and open Metric\m_Roofs. 4 Click OK. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. select Name. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. centerline. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Lines. select Chain. sketch the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 13 On the Options Bar.

press CTRL. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click Modify. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all). Next. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Sections (Type 1). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and then select the exterior face of the wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 21 In the Project Browser. press TAB. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click model.24 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar.

and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. Next.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. sketch the roof footprint. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. m_Roofs. and click Yes. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 5 On the Options Bar. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Views (all). 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Pick Walls.

edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 11 Press CTRL. under Dimensions. Next.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click Finish Roof. clear Defines slope. By default. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. and on the Options Bar. click (Properties). 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select both slope definition lines. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click the model. 15 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

and double-click Level 3. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. m_Roofs. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . press TAB. When you complete the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney.

click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope.6 Click to select all the walls. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. add new slope lines to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Next. Next. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Rectangle). 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Lines. click Finish Roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 10 On the View menu. sketch the chimney opening.

3 On the Options Bar.18 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines slope. click Pick Walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. m_Roofs. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 .rvt.

Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click (Trim/Extend). Next. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Lines. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. using the following illustration for guidance. 7 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. close the roof sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. clear Defines Slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and click (Pick Lines).

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 16 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and click OK. click Roof Properties. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 .12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 17 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. click Finish Roof.

23 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. join the two remaining walls to the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Next. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.

10 To trim the first line segment. select the left vertical roof line. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. press TAB. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 0 for Overhang. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and double-click Level 2. click Pick Walls. Next. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. m_Roofs. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. clear Defines Slope. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click (Trim/Extend). and enter 300 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 6 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.rvt.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. select Defines slope. you add a slope-defining line.rvt. click Modify. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 16 Under Constraints. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 13 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 19 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. Next. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. m_Roofs. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.

click Ref Plane. expand Floor Plans. Next. To help locate the position of each split. click (Pick Lines). and enter 600 for Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. you need to add two reference planes. Before you can add slope arrows. expand Views (all). click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 4 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and double-click Level 2. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 3 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 9 On the Tools menu. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View menu. click Slope Arrow. clear Defines Slope. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.

When eave heights differ. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . When you sketch a hip roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 3 On the Options Bar. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.15 to add the second slope arrow. expand Floor Plans. enter 500 for Rise/1000. m_Roofs. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. select both slope arrows. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and click 19 Under Constraints. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 16 Repeat steps 13 . the adjacent eave heights must align. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Edit. (Properties). 20 Under Dimensions.rvt. and then click OK. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. select Slope for Specify. and double-click Garage Roof. and move the cursor to place the arrow. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof to complete the roof.

The eave lines display with a dimension. under Dimensions. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . (Properties). 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Defines Slope. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. on the Options Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. When aligning eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. on the File menu. 13 On the View toolbar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Align Eaves. click Finish Roof. select a method to align the eaves.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). Next.

Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and double-click North. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. (Properties). click Training Files. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. expand Elevations. 3 Select the roof and. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.rvt. click Modify. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 3. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. expand Views (all). Next. under Dimensions. and select the remaining three lines. click (Pick Lines). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 On the View toolbar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click . create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 10 On the Options Bar. and then select Defines slope. click Lines. click Finish Roof. and click OK.

click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.rvt. click mansard roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. After you add the roof. you add a roof to a building shell. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Save As.17 On the View toolbar.

5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . verify that Defines slope is not selected. double-click Roof. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Because the walls are not continuous.EPDM. and click OK. for Type. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click Roof Properties.Insulation on Metal Deck . select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.

You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. double-click Roof. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and click to select it. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Options Bar. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. under Floor Plans. The roof has been created. click (Draw Split Lines).

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.

Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Next. (Add points). In this exercise. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . 23 On the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. on the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You modify the points individually.

The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. for the dimension. and press ENTER.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 25 Using the same method. enter -2''. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.

Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 31 Select the roof slab. click (Properties). double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 29 On the Design Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . and press ENTER. for Elevation. including the interior edges of the roof regions.27 Press and hold CTRL. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. on the File menu. gutters. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. click Edit/New. 36 View the results in the section view. select Variable. Gutters. you can easily create its fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. for Structure. The entire slab is sloped. for the Thermal/Air Layer. and Soffits on page 586. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and Soffits In this lesson. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating Fascia.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. and soffits in Revit Architecture. click Edit. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Save As. and soffits. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Gutters. under Construction. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. you learn how to create roof fascia. 35 Click OK 3 times. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. After you create a roof. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 37 If you want to save your changes. gutters.

rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and click OK. and click OK twice. and click Open.rvt. and open Common\c_Condominium. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. 3 Press CTRL. 5 On the Options Bar.rfa. under Construction. enter Built-up Fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Training Files. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). select M_Fascia-Built-Up.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

c_Condominium. 13 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters on page 588. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.rvt. click (Properties).

5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and click OK three times. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. Creating Gutters | 589 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. Creating Soffits on page 590. . click Edit/New. 10 Click to place the gutter. under Construction. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value field for Material.3 In the Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Duplicate.

click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit.Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . c_Condominium. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views.rvt.

and double-click 3D.4 Select the roof. expand Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. click Finish Sketch. 8 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. 7 On the Tools menu. Creating Soffits | 591 . Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

on the File menu. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.9 If you want to save your changes.

You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally. and open Common\c_Area. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select mm. click Project Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 593 . select Millimeters. your values will be different. click Training Files. Click OK. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. under Length. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. For Unit Suffix. If you are using metric units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. In the final exercise. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.

Click OK. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Settings. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. These schemes define spatial relationships. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click the Room Calculations tab. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. and click Room and Area. click OK. For Rounding. select Square meters. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click the Area Schemes tab. expand Views (all). select 2 decimal places. the system-computed height defaults to the level. select m2.3 Under Area. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. or 0. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. it is not necessary in this exercise. 4 In the Project Units dialog. For Unit Suffix. and verify that Level 1 is the active view.

NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). Click OK. forming a closed loop.You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. under Views (all). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 9 Click Cancel. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must select one of the reference lines. If you select No. you must manually add these boundary lines. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 13 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area. rather than the area tag. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 12 When the informational dialog displays. To modify the area. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area Plan. When you select Yes in this dialog. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines.

Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. and store area. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Next.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area Plan. Click OK. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. common areas. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall.

you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. and click to select the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click ■ . 25 On the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 27 On the Options Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. If you do not select this option.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Office area for Area Type. click Area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Click OK. Click OK. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 32 On the Options Bar.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. click Modify and select the area. click ■ ■ ■ . 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 31 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

■ Click OK. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and select Store Area for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

click Save. and click to place the legend. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. click Color Scheme Legend. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. and click Save. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 37 On the File menu. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.

6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Area Type and click Add. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.3 When the dialog displays. select Areas (Rentable). 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. and click OK.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you can specify the view to display massing elements. If you modify a massing face. roofs. 603 . building elements. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. In this tutorial.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. After you make building elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. At any time. and floors. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You assign the default wall. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. and perimeter information. you then need to update the building face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. floors. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and roofs. or both. floor. volume. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. curtain systems. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After creating mass floors. Using Massing Tools In this lesson.

3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. and cutting geometry. double-click Level 1. and click Massing. 5 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. click Create Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. under Floor Plans. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps. click Training Files.

19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. for Name. and click . enter 25000. click Extrusion Properties.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. select Mass (Opaque). 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click the value for Material. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. under Views (all). under Materials and Finishes. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. enter 1550 mm. for Extrusion End. click 18 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 13 On the View toolbar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click (Default 3D View). (Line). and click OK. (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 15 On the View Control Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. click Lines.

28 On the Design Bar. highlight the larger form. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 23 In the Materials dialog. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click OK. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 30 In the drawing area. and click . The second form is on top of the first form.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). for Extrusion Start. enter 25000. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Mass (Transparent). for Extrusion End. and click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. under Materials and Finishes. select Pick a plane. 26 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. for Name. and click OK. under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 27500. under Views (all). click Finish Sketch. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click West. click the value for Material. TIP If necessary.

31 Click to select the face. 34 On the Options Bar. (Pick Lines). click (Draw). click (Arc passing through three points). you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and on the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and clear Chain. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and click to select the line start point. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next.

double-click East. click Modify. under Views (all). 608 | Chapter 17 Massing .TIP If you do not see this option. click (Move). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and delete the vertical construction line. click Edit Top. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. (Line). click the arrow next to the drawing options. under Elevations (Building Elevation). on the Options Bar. click Lines and. 39 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. click 49 Create an arc as shown. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 53 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. (Arc passing through three points). 54 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 52 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 .48 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). for Material. click Blend Properties. In the next exercise. In this exercise.

click (Line). These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. select the mass. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select Chain. under Floor Plans. 2 In the drawing area. as shown. 4 On the Options bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 7 Using the same technique. click Lines. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. double-click Level 1. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . m_Massing_Start. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.rvt. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. for Extrusion End. When sketching each extrusion. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. Using Swept Blends | 611 . on the View Control Bar. click Extrusion Properties. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. In this exercise. 15 Click OK. click (Default 3D View). 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 0.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. select a point below the mass elements. click Sketch 2D Path. and click Lines. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Massing_Start. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.rvt. ■ For the radius. 3 On the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). under Floor Plans. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

6 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Rectangle). 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click Finish Path. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 11 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. as shown. click Profile 1. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 9 On the Options Bar. and click Edit. click (Default 3D View).

and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 15 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and press ESC. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Finish Profile. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. click (Align). 17 Using the same method.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Profile 2.

click Finish Profile. click <By Category>. 22 Click OK twice. Using Swept Blends | 615 . and click . click Finish Swept Blend. under Materials and Finishes. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties.

click Finish Mass. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.24 On the Design Bar. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson.rvt. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you create new family types from a mass family file. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Finally. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In this exercise.

rfa. for Height. enter 6000 mm. 7 Click New.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click Apply. 8 For Width. enter 12000 mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. for Depth. for Width. and for Name. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. enter 68000 mm. 6 For Width. for Height. enter 46000mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. and click OK. for Depth. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and for Name. enter 11000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. under Other. and click OK. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . 9 Click OK. click Family Types. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 15000mm. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 5 Click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 9000 mm. enter 18000 mm. enter 18000 mm. and click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Height. and click OK. click New.

rfa. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 6 Open the Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 8 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. Arc Dome.rfa family files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder.rfa. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Training Files. double-click Site. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. You also load other existing mass families and place them. Semi Barrel Vault. and Triangle. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. as shown. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 1 If not already selected. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Training Files. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. on the View toolbar. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all).Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.rfa.

19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click (Element Properties). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. as shown. enter 90 for Angle. for the Material parameter.10 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 17 Press CTRL. 11 Select the box. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click Modify. select Rotate after placement. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. 14 In the Type Selector. select the triangle. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 20 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click to place the mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 25 In the drawing area. 16 On the Design Bar.

and click OK twice. click Place Mass. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 33 On the View toolbar. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. click (Default 3D View). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Opaque). 29 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

rvt file. you join these mass elements. click (Default 3D View). In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. (Join Geometry). the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click (Mirror). double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.

Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. enter SM. click (Draw). 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. and then select the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . for Axis. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. (Join Geometry). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 17 Press ESC to see the result.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. do not clear the check mark. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Modify. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.rvt. you joined mass elements together. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Window menu. (If Design Options is already selected. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.In this exercise. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise.

under Floor Plans. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. 14 In the drawing area. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. select Rotate after placement. for Angle. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for the Material parameter. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. click Place Mass. 17 In the Type Selector. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Modify. and click OK. specify Mass (Transparent). 7 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Views (all). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 90. 8 On the Options Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . clear Curved. select Sloped (primary).

click Modify. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 23 On the View Control Bar. double-click North. select the three arc domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. clear Sloped. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under 3D Views. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Curved. While pressing CTRL. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK twice. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 28 In the Project Browser. and click (Element Properties).TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and watch the status bar. under Views (all). move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 20 In the drawing area. under Elevations. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Add to Design Option Set). 22 In the Project Browser. for the Material parameter.

33 In the Design Options dialog. 34 Close the warning that displays. click (Design Options). select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click the Design Options tab. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . you can make it the primary option. and click Close. select Curved and. click Make Primary. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you placed mass elements into Design Options. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 31 Click the value for Design Option. 35 On the File menu. under Option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click OK.rvt. In this exercise.

select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. you pick massing faces to create walls. 6 On the Options Bar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. click (Pick Faces). double-click {3D}.rvt. under Views (all). select Basic Wall: Exterior . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 2 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Views (all). double-click Level 5. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. If desired. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. perimeter. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. volume.rvt. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. click Mass Floors.In this exercise. double-click {3D}. Curtain Systems. 6 On the Options Bar. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . under Views (all). Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. select all levels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. When you select levels. click Modify. 4 Click OK. and exterior surface area.

632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL. click Modify.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Mass Floors. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. select Levels 1-4.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. 15 Press CTRL. and click OK. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. under Available fields. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. The Floor Area. and click OK.rvt. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Add. and select Level. select Mass Floor. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Floor Perimeter. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Volume.In this exercise. press and hold SHIFT. 4 Using the same method. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. and click OK. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. for Sort by. select Mass: Family and Type.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. enter Retail. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. and click Remove. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. and click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Scheduled fields (in order). under Other. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. After you assign usage. 13 With Usage selected. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 14 Select Level. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. select Mass: Family and Type.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit.

20 Click in the title of the schedule. elevation. enter Hotel. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Fields. select Usage.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice. 22 In the Project Browser. for Then by. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Other. and in the field below. 23 In the Rename View dialog. select Calculate totals. and click Properties. for Filter by. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. in the field under Filter by. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 18 On the Filter tab. 16 On the Formatting tab. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. for Filter. 19 Click OK twice. and click Rename. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Field formatting. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and select Grand totals. and plan views. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. select Level. click Edit. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Edit. under Other. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . select Floor Area. enter Retail (instead of Hotel).

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. floor perimeter. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. you pick massing faces to create roofs. you created mass floor schedules. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. by level. The mass floor schedules list. the floor area. click Roof by Face. double-click {3D}. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic . 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.400mm. click Create Roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing .8 Using the method you just learned. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and click OK. and Walls. select Sloped Glazing. 12 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. Curtain Systems. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Curtain Panels. 13 Using the same method. In this exercise. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Curtain System by Face. click Create System. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. double-click {3D}. 3 In the Type Selector.

create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

11 Using the same method.9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

12 Click Modify to exit the command. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt.

for Width. and click OK. Floors. enter 30000. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Views (all). 3 On the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . under Floor Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Exclude Design Options.1 In the Project Browser. Roofs. Curtain Systems. click Modify. double-click Site. and click (Element Properties). and then click OK. and Walls. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. Next. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 7 On the Options Bar.

In the next steps. double-click Level 1. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Floor Plans. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. under Views (all).

Also. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the roof as shown. click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click Remake. click (Default 3D View). you want to select the smaller one. 14 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog.TIP To select the curtain wall.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 On the Options Bar. click Remake. and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

1 Open the 3D view. under Schedules/Quantities.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise.

650 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click {3D}. click All to select all categories.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under 3D Views.Massing only. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 4 Rename the view 3D . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

In this exercise. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof. You might create the model shown.

652 .

It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Creating. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. hotel rooms. the host group is also updated automatically. you also simplify the modification process. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. all instances in the building model are updated. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. When you make changes to a nested group. In another exercise. Modifying. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. By grouping objects. After you create a model group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and modify repetitive units. 653 . or with those working on a different project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You mirror one instance of the group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. For example. In this tutorial. you not only simplify their placement. place. In this exercise. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and typical office layouts. you add the new model group to a previously created group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. You can also nest groups within other groups.

and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Floor Plans. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all).rvt. enter ZR.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. and click OK. enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify.

Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups.

658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate).

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated.

and click to select it. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. press TAB to highlight the wall. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. click Save As. Modifying a Group | 661 . Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group In this exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. When you finish editing. and click Save. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

7 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. click Modify. and click member to group instance.3 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element. 8 On the Design Bar.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). and click to select the door.). select the element. 4 Move the cursor over the door. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

click Door. 10 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Wall. select Basic Wall : Generic .127mm. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. move the cursor to the left. 14 In the Type Selector. Modifying a Group | 663 .

select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. move the cursor up. 21 On the Options Bar.17 On the Design Bar. In edit group mode. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. 23 In the drawing area. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style.

click Modify. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. created in an earlier lesson. and click OK. enter 2134.25 On the Design Bar. for Unconnected Height. (Element Properties). 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. 29 On the group editor toolbar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups | 665 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. enter 1000. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click 28 For Base Offset. 26 Select the opening. Nesting Groups In this exercise. you add the Typical Kitchen group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. which acts as the host. under Constraints. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group.

click Edit Group. in the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . under Floor Plans. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. double-click First Floor.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. select the Typical Kitchen group.

Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor.6 Press TAB. and each of the bifold doors. select the wall between the folding doors. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 667 . under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and filled regions. such as door and window tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. double-click First Floor. under Floor Plans. In the next exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. such as text. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 .

14 On the Edit toolbar. click to add an arc leader. and select the text note and the filled region. and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 Enter Tile. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click Text. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click (Group). and on the Design Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog.

click Modify. under Groups. expand Detail. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 22 On the Design Bar. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown.

7 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Door Tags. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click Check None. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. click (Group). 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.

you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. therefore. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. and click OK.

Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . for Create new. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save. 3 For File name. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. expand Groups. click OK. under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click Desktop. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 On the Design Bar. A warning dialog displays. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. In this case. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Modify. browse to the Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and expand Model.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click OK. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Same as group name is selected.rvt.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Project is selected. and click Open. accept the default template file. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

expand Revit Links. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Training Files.rvt. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. When a group is converted to a link. 18 In the Project Browser. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and click OK. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 17 On the Design Bar. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the linked Revit model.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 24 In the message dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. click Bind. click Link. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

you add a building pad to the site. islands. You add property lines manually. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. and then modify the data. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.Site 19 In this tutorial. Using Site Tools In this lesson. 677 . You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the final exercises. convert the data to a table.

you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Point. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface using two different methods.rvt. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Site. and click Site. click Toposurface.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 On the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. Using the first method. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_First_Project. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 4 On the Options Bar.

Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Use the following illustration as a reference. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 12000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm.8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Increment. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. under Additional Contours. 15000mm. click Site Settings. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. and click OK. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . Use the following illustration as a reference. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. enter 1500mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle.

modify the level names and elevations. click to view it at various angles. 19 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). click the elevation value. enter 1000mm. and press ENTER. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and double-click South. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click to delete it. 18 In the Project Browser. Before importing the contour data. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 16 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).

and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. double-click Site. and press ENTER. For Layers. click Yes. For Colors. click Pin Position. and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. rename the level Base Site Elevation. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.21 Click the Level 2 text. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 24 In the Project Browser. it is considered an import symbol. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click Training Files. Click Open. under Views (all). click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 30 On the Edit menu. under Floor Plans. select Specify. select Preserve. 29 Select the imported topography. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. rename the level Basement. 23 Click the Level 1 text.

Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. and then click OK. 34 Under Visibility. click Toposurface. and click OK. clear Elevations. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. clear C_INDX. when the edges highlight. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. click the Annotation Categories tab. select it. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. When you select the import symbol. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click Visibility/Graphics.31 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Adding Property Lines on page 684. click (SteeringWheels).rvt. Using the second method. and click Save.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click (Default 3D View). 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the first method. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 40 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. name the project Site-in progress. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 39 On the Design Bar. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.

and click OK. click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. under Floor Plans. click Property Line. Click Modify. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. do so before continuing. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. select Create property lines by sketching. double-click Site. Adding Property Lines | 685 . On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Site-in progress.

click OK. select the lines. when they highlight. click Property Line. click OK. and click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 9 In the warning dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. A warning dialog is displayed. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. to delete them. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. on the Standard toolbar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . add an arc line on the right. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. click to place the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 19 In the Tags dialog. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 16 Click OK. If the gap is not closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 15 Starting in Row #1. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

click Visibility/Graphics. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click the Imported Categories tab. and click Drafting. 23 On the View menu. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Training Files. In the next exercise. clear Leader. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 25 Under Visibility.dwg and click OK. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. In the final step. you created two sets of property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. right-click in the Design Bar. you loaded and tagged the property line segments.20 Click Load. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 22 In the Tags dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. The tags display more prominently in this view. and click OK. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. In this exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click to place it. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. this project file is required in its current state. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. Before adding property line segment tags.

scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Topography. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 6 In the Object Styles dialog.rvt. click New. and click OK. Under Subcategory. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select Single Value. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 7 Click OK. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. select a shade of Brown. Under Line Pattern. enter the name Working Contour. click Site Settings. enter 1000. select Working Contour. Under Range Type. click Object Styles. 2 On the Settings menu. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for Subcategory. Site-in progress. under Contour Line Display. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select Dash dot.0mm. Under Line Color. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 10 Under Additional Contours. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start.

displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. The object style subcategory. and islands.11 Click OK. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. In the next exercise. parking areas. In this exercise. such as material. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . you create subregions in order to define roads. Working Contour. you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise requires a new training file. parking areas.

click Lines. click Training Files. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and open Metric\m_Site. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although the exact dimensions are not important. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Subregion. 2 On the Design Bar.

Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK. select Site . 6 In the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. under Materials and Finishes. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .NOTE In the Metric training file. click Properties. enter Parking for Name.

15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Edit Boundary.9 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Topography Schedule. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. they display within this schedule. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . As you create new subregions. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 .Tarmacadam. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.

you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. Within each subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. Delete overlapping lines. 17 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Notice that the project area has increased. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . In this training project. under Floor Plans. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

double-click Topography Schedule. 30 In the Project Browser. click the value for Material. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Properties.Grass for Name. select Site . 29 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Identity Data. 24 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .Grass for Name. 26 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. enter Island . click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 28 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.23 In the upper-right parking area. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities.

add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . under Schedules/Quantities. and apply the material Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. You must sketch each region separately. 34 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule.31 In the Project Browser.Grass. Name the subregion Walkway. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .walkway. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name each region Island Grass. double-click Site.

37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 38 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . under Schedules/Quantities. there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.

41 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. this project file is required in its current state. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site tutorial-in progress. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.

Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Existing for Phase Created. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . under Phasing.3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. A warning dialog is displayed. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click Modify. see the tutorial. Using Phasing on page 761. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. click (Element Properties). and click Select and Edit. 8 Select the topographic surface.

The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and new. demolished.

702 | Chapter 19 Site . The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click Point. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Surface. 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. 18 On the View toolbar. 19 On the View Control Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

and delete it. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading.20 On the View toolbar. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Therefore. under Phasing. specify New Construction for Phase. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and click OK. Only the graded topography displays. (SteeringWheels). 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. specify Existing for Phase. and click OK. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. only the original toposurface displays. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 23 Select the toposurface. you create a building pad. click to view it at various angles. 24 On the View menu. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. click View Properties. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. this project file is required in its current state. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. under Phasing. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. you can delete it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. When you add a building pad.

the Pick Walls command is active. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch. If you have an existing building model. Site tutorial-in progress. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE By default. 6 On the Design Bar. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 On the View Control Bar.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. this project file is required in its current state. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). 9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building pad. Adding Site Components on page 706. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and select the parking space. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 706 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . click Modify.90 deg. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Parking Component. under Floor Plans.Adding Site Components In this exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 3 In the Type Selector.

7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

under Floor Plans. click (SteeringWheels). 708 | Chapter 19 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click Site Component. Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. 12 In the Type Selector. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.9 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Site Components | 709 . click (SteeringWheels). In the following illustration. 15 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar.

3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. double-click Site. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. and click OK. 5 On the View menu. click Hidden Line. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Apply.rvt. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . to position the shoulder of the leader. outside of the site. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click again to the left to position the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. In the following exercise.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. as shown: 10 Using the same method. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 8 On the Options Bar. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported.

11 On the Design Bar. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. click Modify. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 On the Design Bar.

8 Under Fields. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 11 On the Window menu. number the first three spaces consecutively. click Close Hidden Windows. enter Size. select Type. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tile. double-click Site. and click Add. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 7 Under Fields. under Views (all). This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click OK. under Floor Plans. The parking schedule is displayed. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and under Heading. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. select Parking for Category. select Mark. If necessary. select Type. and under Heading. select Mark. Site tutorial-in progress. 9 On the Window menu. 12 In the Site plan. 5 Under Available fields. under Space. and click Add. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click the Fields tab. enter Space.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

use Element Borrowing. doors. go to the Worksets dialog. select the desired workset. such as walls. and so on. floors. you specify an active workset. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. called Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. To make a workset editable. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. You can enable Worksharing for any project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. stairs. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. After the project is shared. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. All other team members can view this workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. 717 . however. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. and click Editable. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Working in a shared project In a shared project. they cannot make changes to it. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. When you are working on a shared project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. such as annotations and dimensions. In this tutorial. Elements specific to a view. you must first enable Worksharing. Using Worksharing. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.

In the next exercise. you can select which worksets are open or closed.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. In a multi-story structure. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. When setting up Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. such as a tenant interior. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Instead. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. In the lessons and exercises that follow.

greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. On this tab. and View worksets. each team member has control over a portion of the design. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. In most projects. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. designers work in teams. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. When creating the new worksets. with each assigned a specific functional task. As new members create worksets for their own use. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. not including the Project Standards. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. When you create a new workset. Regardless of the default setting. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Shared Levels and Grids. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. You should have at least one workset for each person. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Experience has shown that. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. for a typical project. Team member roles Typically. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access.

This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you can select which workset is active. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Generally. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. your changes propagate to the entire team. Therefore. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. After saving to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. However. For example. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. proceeds as usual. When you save to the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. within the local file. When you save locally (to your local file). On the Options Bar.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. This is called “Selective Open. the file is saved as the central file. if a workset named Interior was created. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. As you work. you make that workset editable by you. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. however. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. you should then save to your local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. your changes are saved. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. When you save to the central file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. This makes them available to other team members. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.

In this conceptual exercise. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this instance. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. using VPN. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Alternatively. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. make any required worksets editable. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. In this situation. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. reload the latest changes from the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. if you know who checked out the required workset. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. for instance. and make that workset editable. you work no differently then you would in the office. and then save the local file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. To do this. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should check out the Materials workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. save to the central file. When working remotely.

A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. The Worksets dialog displays. and open Common\c_Worksets. click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.rvt. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Your username displays as the present owner.In the next exercise. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. 3 In the Worksets dialog. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. click Worksets. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and notice all are editable by you." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

9 Click New. select Workset1. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. type the name Exterior Shell. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. When you initially activate Worksharing. click OK. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. clear Families. Therefore. click New. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Project Standards. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently.When you enable worksharing. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. For example. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. however. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". and double-click Level 1. You do. 14 In the Worksets dialog. 16 In the drawing area. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 13 In the Rename dialog. imagine four users including yourself. clear Visible by default in all views. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Only User-Created worksets should display. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. In this simple training project. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. In this case. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. For training purposes. expand Floor Plans. currently named Workset1. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. ■ 5 Under Show. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . 11 In the Worksets dialog. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 12 Click Rename. it is better to make them visible by default. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. In this training file. expand Views (all). 8 Click OK. another is assigned the interior layout. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and click OK. and Views.

28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. select Interior Layout for Workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. under Identity Data. and walls. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 29 Click OK. including the interior doors. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 26 On the View menu. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 19 Click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. stairs. 20 Select one of the interior walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset.17 On the Options Bar. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. click . click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . 23 Select all of the interior elements. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset.

select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. If any interior elements remain. 33 In the Project Browser. 30 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 35 On the Options Bar. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 39 Click Save.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click the Worksets tab. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. under Identity Data. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click Close. and click OK. click . double-click Level 2. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. select Interior Layout for Workset. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 34 In the drawing area. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Now that you have created the central file. you enabled Worksharing on a project. In this exercise. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 32 Select Interior Layout. and click OK. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 43 Click OK. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Visibility/Graphics. 38 In the Save As dialog. 44 On the File menu. click Save As. click Worksets. click Non Editable.

click Worksets. click Save As. please do so before continuing. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. make modifications to the building model. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select the central file. click Options. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Next. and click Save. expand Views (all). select Interior Layout. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and select Specify. 7 In the Save As dialog. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 4 Click Open. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. you create your local file. In this case. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. select all the User-Created worksets. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Before working on the model. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 12 Click OK. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. check out worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. select Interior Layout for Name. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Open. 2 In the Open dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 6 On the File menu. 13 On the Window menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. expand Floor Plans. In addition.

Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. In the Worksets dialog. click Modify. click . In this case. however. click Worksets. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 23 On the File menu. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . Because this element is not owned by another user. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. under Identity Data. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 21 On the Options Bar. Verify that it is cleared. 22 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice the Editable Only option. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this is selected. 20 Under Constraints. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If it was owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. click . the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 24 Click OK.

27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. The precise location is not important. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.126mm Partition (2-hr). click Modify. 26 Delete the door. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select Basic Wall: Interior . 29 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 34 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall.

add two door openings into the rooms you created. each user must check out worksets. You modified the building model. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. If you have not yet completed these exercises. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you created your local file. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. it is recommended. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. click Save to Central. and save locally immediately afterward. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In this particular case. please do so before continuing. leave this file open in its current state. make elements editable. Whenever you save. Throughout the process. which matches the information in the Status Bar. save to central. displays the workset as well as the element type. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. In this exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. checked out worksets. and reload the latest changes. In addition. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. When working in your local file. At the end of a work session. By default. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. For training purposes. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Borrowed Elements is selected. a tooltip. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you should perform regular saves. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. two users access the central file through a network connection.

8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 9 Click Open. This file is for your use only.rvt. In addition. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. under Username. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Open. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. click Options. and select Yes for Editable. 15 On the File menu. and select Specify. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. select the central file. one user has already created a local file. click Worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click OK.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 3 On the Settings menu. For training purposes. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and proceed to Creating a local copy. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Options. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 11 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 7 In the Open dialog. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. skip the following section. and click OK. enter User 2. instructions are staggered. and click OK. consider that person to be User 1. You now have a local copy of the project. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. select all the User-Created worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. click Save As. and reset the Username to your computer login name. User 2: Create a local file. 4 Click the General Tab and.

and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 19 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. it becomes the active workset. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. click Save to Central. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. and double-click Level 1. open it now. 23 Click OK. 27 On the File menu. 24 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall.You are now the owner of that workset. If you only have one workset checked out.” 29 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. If it is not open. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 17 Click OK. expand Views (all). 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. expand Floor Plans. modify the building model. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user.

36 Using the following illustration as a guide. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 44 In the Project Browser. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. you should create a furniture plan view. click Reload Latest. 41 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. When you save to central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. Click Yes. and click Rename.” 35 Click OK. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 46 In the Project Browser. Before adding any furniture. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 33 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Worksets. 43 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. However. click Save to Central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Copy of Level 1. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Views (all). 37 On the File menu.

click Worksets. select Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. and click Element Properties. click Modify. NOTE System families. 53 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Edit/New. click Reload Latest. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. choose any desk.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. are placed under Project Standards. 50 On the View menu. click Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Exterior Wall . Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. and click OK. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. the Visible by default option was not selected. and click OK. click Rename. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 59 In the Type Properties dialog.” 55 Click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. and click inside any room. 61 Click OK 2 times. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 63 In the Worksets dialog.200mm. 48 In the Type Selector. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. under Show. 49 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 65 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. click Component. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 66 On the File menu. such as Wall Types. Therefore. rather than Families. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 67 In the Save to Central dialog.

select Reload Latest. In subsequent steps. User 1: Reload latest. you need to set up your central and local files. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). There are specific instructions for each user. leave this file open in its current state. and these problems are rectified. select Save to Central. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Training Files. 3 In the Save As dialog. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Each user must have network access to the central file. In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click Options. and save 69 On the File menu. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Each user checked out worksets. you save the training file as a central file. click Save As. and click OK. As each of you work. and published their changes back to the central file. throughout this training. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . finished the previous workset exercises. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and still have your local files open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 70 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. This exercise requires two users and. modified the building model. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. select the following. Checking out worksets. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Save As. and click Save. and click OK. This is a system setting. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and click Save. click Options. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 Click Open. click Options. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and select Specify. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 12 On the File menu. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Open. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. On the Settings menu. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. This is the local file for User 1. In addition. 13 In the Open dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. The central file should still be open. Next. select the central file. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 6 On the File menu. select Make this a Central File after save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Set the Username to User 2. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. return to the Settings dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 8 In the Save As dialog. 5 Click Save. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. 17 On the File menu. 18 In the Save As dialog.

User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select the Interior Layout workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 29 On the Options Bar. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click the File menu. and then click OK. double-click Level 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. if any User-Created worksets are not open. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. and select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 27 Under Active Workset. After you submit the request. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 24 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. At this point. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click Open. select Interior Layout. select the second window from the top. select them. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 30 On the left exterior wall. select Exterior Shell. click Worksets. Afterwards. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization.

to Local. and the other user granted it. 36 Click Close. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. click Check Now. 38 Click OK. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. A message informs you that your request has been granted. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 35 Click Grant. and close 39 On the File menu. and click OK. In this case. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . click Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select the following. In this multi-user exercise. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. you requested permission to edit the element. select the request submitted by User 2. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog.

738 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. For example. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. In this tutorial. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Using design options. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. 739 . you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. At any time in the design process.

Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.In this particular case. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After you create a design option. each with multiple design options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. under Option Set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. In the second exercise.rvt. therefore. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. make your final design decision. and delete the unwanted options from the project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the final exercise of this lesson. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you set up multiple design option sets. the roof and structure systems must work together. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. click Training Files. With the second option. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The client has asked you to create various options. the only available command is to create a new option set. click New. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you can edit it. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you design each of the structural options. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In the first exercise in this lesson.

select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. select: ■ ■ ■ . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. expand Views (all). In this case. 5 On the View menu. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Column. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the third column centered between the two. and click Close. expand Floor Plans. By selecting Multiple. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. and double-click ROOF TERRACE.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 4 In the Project Browser. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. TIP To center the middle column. add three columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 7 In the Type Selector. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. click Modify. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . click 12 On the Options Bar. click Edit Selected.

click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 Zoom out and. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. In the following illustration. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. When you are finished. using the same technique. they are difficult to see in this view. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. A copy of the three selected columns is added.14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.

you add the beams that span the columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The first click specifies the beam start point. Use the following illustration as a guide. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom in on the upper right column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. double-click TOP OF CORE. In it.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Next. select Round Bar : 50mm. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam. 21 In the Type Selector. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Adding a beam is a two-click process. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. under Floor Plans. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

and click the center point. 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. click . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. and click OK. click New. enter Brackets for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. 45 Under Roofing. under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click Rename. click Rename. under Option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click New. click Rename. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. 33 Click Finish Editing. enter Structure for New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 40 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. There should now be two roofing design options. under Option Set. click New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. name the option Louvers. and click OK. under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Roofing for New. 46 Under Option. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.

53 In the Project Browser. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 48 Under Option. and click OK. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 Click Close. click Rename. 51 Under Edit. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration. select Edit Selected. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 50 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. select Beam. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. name the option Sunscreen. When finished. you create the second design option. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Floor Plans.

58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 56 In the Type Selector. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Align. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first click sets the move start point. click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar.

66 On the View toolbar. 69 Click Close. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. which is visible by default. click . NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 67 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. 68 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. name the file. click Finish Editing.rvt. m_Urban_House-in progress. 70 On the File menu. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Save As.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. and click Save.

select Louvers (primary). you set up multiple design option sets. delete them after the rafter is in place. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. expand Floor Plans. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 8 In the Type Selector. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. expand Views (all). Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Under Now Editing. a Louver system. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.In this exercise. The first option. Sunscreen. you design each of the roofing options. do so now. With the second option. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 5 Click Close. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Edit. 2 On the Tools menu. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The dimensions shown are for training purposes.rvt. each with multiple design options to pick from. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The second roofing system. the other for beams. under Roofing. If you need to add dimensions. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. open it now. click Edit Selected.

enter 11750 mm for Length. click Modify. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 13 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click . Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. and click OK.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move To. Select Constrain. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Array. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 990. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Component. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 For the array starting point. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. 23 On the Options Bar. and click Array. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. and select the louver you just placed. 20 In the Type Selector. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 25 With the louver still selected. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click . enter 5475 mm for Length. Enter 34 for Number. Select Constrain. click the Edit menu. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. under Other. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar.

Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. click . when the listening dimension displays. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and. and press Enter. 29 On the View toolbar. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and double-click West. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. In this case. 30 On the Tools menu. click . 37 In the Work Plane dialog. under Roofing. 40 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . and then click Close. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof.The louver roof system is complete. Click OK. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 33 Under Editing. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 34 In the Project Browser. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Finish Editing. under Edit. click Lines. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. expand Elevations. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 39 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Sunscreen. Therefore. click Edit Selected.

You will fix this in a later step. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 46 On the Tools menu. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. then the center arc. the top of the next column on the right. The arcs should connect. click Properties. 48 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 41 Select the top of the left column. then you can modify it through the dimension. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 45 Click OK. and the third point defines the arc. 43 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 49 On the View toolbar. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The first two points define the ends of the line. Select the right arc. click Trim/Extend. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. Under Constraints. click .

right-click the 3D View Primary Option. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. a Louver system. and click Rename. expand 3D Views. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. enter Primary Option. Managing Design Options | 757 . tertiary. you need this file in its current state. Sunscreen. under Views (all). and delete the discarded design options. make it part of the building model. do so now. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 52 On the File menu. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click OK. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Save. and last options. under Edit. click Finish Editing. and then click Close. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Managing Design Options In this exercise. under Views (all). secondary. and click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The first option. You have completed the sunscreen roof system.The louver roof system is complete. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. you designed each of the roofing options. 50 On the Tools menu. After exploring the combinations. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 51 In the Design Options dialog. you select a design. 4 In the Project Browser. The second roofing system.

12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. under 3D Views. double-click Primary Option. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click Rename. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View menu. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. 7 On the View menu. 9 Click OK.5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser.

the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. Managing Design Options | 759 . the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. click the Design Options tab. At this point. 15 On the View menu. In this case. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. In your design options. double-click Last Option. double-click Tertiary Option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under 3D Views. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

you selected a design. This was the client choice for structural. 24 Under Option. click Save. click Yes. In this exercise. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Accept Primary. click Delete. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. select Beam. 30 Under Option Set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views.22 On the Tools menu. the current primaries are no longer options. An alert is displayed. 31 In the alert dialog. select Make Primary. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Because the client has selected the design option. under Structure. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Close. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 27 In the alert dialog. 26 Under Option Set. click Yes. since you no longer need them. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 35 On the File menu. double-click Primary Option. and deleted the discarded design options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. made it part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 25 Select Structure. 29 Select Roofing. After exploring the combinations. The set is deleted.

and then add new building model elements. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. demolish existing construction. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. 761 . In the second exercise. complete with schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. For the client. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. demolish existing walls and doors.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. you do not need to change the project units to metric. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Cancel. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. This means that all building model elements. under Phasing. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 4 Click Cancel. under Phasing. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click (Element Properties).rvt. are visible in this view. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. expand Views (all). You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. click Project Units. click Modify. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. When you create a new project. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. define the units. regardless of phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. go to the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Phasing. As you add new elements to the building model. During the demolition and renovation process. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. If you wish to do so.

are highlighted in red. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 . 18 In the Project Browser. all of the building model elements. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. click (Filter Selection).Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. right-click Level 1 . select Existing. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. right-click Copy of Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. under Floor Plans. under Phasing. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 20 In the Rename dialog. 11 In the Filter dialog. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 19 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 .Demo. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 17 Click No. for Phase Created. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. 16 In the Rename dialog. including the door tags. clear Door Tags. and click OK. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. Because this is a phase-specific view. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. click Modify. click .Existing. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. After you release the mouse button. After you create the views. Phasing Your Model | 763 .Existing.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. and click Rename. right-click Level 1.

Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Floor Plans. Later in this exercise. In this case. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. double-click Level 1 . 21 In the Project Browser. for Phase. You may need to zoom in to see this. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 28 Under Filter Name. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Composite Plan. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Phase status is time-dependent. 26 In the Phasing dialog. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. There are five default phase filters. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. double-click Level 1 . Next. under New. you modify these settings. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. On a logical time line. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. however. Demolished. new construction occurs after existing construction. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Because of this time relationship.Demo.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 27 Click New. 29 For Composite Plan. to which all the building model elements belong. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status.Existing. click the Phase Filters tab. Existing. and click OK. select Overridden. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. and Temporary. select Existing.

41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. under Floor Plans. Next. click the value for Color. 34 In the Color dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. 42 In the Project Browser. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click (Demolish). select Demolished. under Floor Plans. There are two ways to demolish an element. you begin demolition.31 Under Phase Status. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. or you can use the demolish tool. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. under Cut ➤ Lines. 35 Click OK twice. select red. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 39 In the Phasing dialog. its display changes to a red dashed line. double-click Level 1 . 36 Using the same method.Demo. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. As you click each wall. select a lighter blue.Existing. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. double-click Level 1 . 32 In the Demolished row. When you demolish the host. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Phasing Your Model | 765 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select the line style. you demolish all elements hosted by it. click OK. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. click Wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). add a long horizontal wall. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. 50 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Interior . 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.Existing. 53 Open Level 1 . The demolished walls no longer display. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 47 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 52 Open Level 1 . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Filter. select Show Previous + New. for Phase Filter. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Door.Demo. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors.

Demo. 60 On the View toolbar. Phasing Your Model | 767 . which are displayed as red. regardless of phase. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 59 Open Level 1 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 57 In the Project Browser. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. new is shown in blue. click (Default 3D View). right-click Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. and existing shows as half-tone. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.New. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. All elements are displayed in this view. 62 If necessary. 61 On the View Control Bar.

They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. 63 Close the file. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. 3 Open Level 1 . therefore. If you wish to do so. and double-click Level 1 . and click OK. the rooms change in both definition and size. You can also see that the room quantities. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. click Project Units. you can do so at this time. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In this exercise. you do not need to change the project units to metric. As the renovation process continues. and new construction. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. demolition. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Demo. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In this view. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. you can see the new walls added to the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. go to the Settings menu. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Notice that this view is the original building model. define the units. 2 Open Level 1 .Existing.New. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. All room boundaries are phase-specific. expand Views (all). The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation.rvt. click Training Files. If you wish to save this file. In the next exercise. In this view. sizes. expand Floor Plans.

Demo. click in each room as you move to the right. click Room Tag.New. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 13 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Existing. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room. In the Phasing dialog. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room. 10 Open Level 1 .

click Tile.Existing. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. In this case. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. and double-click Room Schedule . This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 19 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In addition. In this exercise. View phase-specific room schedules. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Close Hidden Windows. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.New Construction. The two schedule views tile. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 18 Open Room Schedule .

or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. performance. In the final lesson. and manage the links throughout the project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on the site plan. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. modify their visibility. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. In these situations. Comparison of alternatives on a site.

Linking Building Models In this lesson. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link two building models to the project.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. One building model is a condominium. and the other is a townhouse. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site.

Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. 4 On the File menu. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. however. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. right-click. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Manual . Otherwise. click Open. click Close.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. select the three files. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 5 On the File menu. 8 Clear Read-only. RELATED See the lesson. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . click Save As. and click Properties. and click OK. and open Common\c_Site. All three files now reside. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.■ Auto . 2 On the File menu. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.rvt. ■ ■ Manual . c_Condo_Complex. Select c_Site. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . this option will place the link at a predefined location. c_Townhouse. with write permission. click Training Files.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Auto . you can do so. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. This option is grayed out. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. in the Model Linking folder that you created. this system is not exposed to the user. and save the file there. Click Open. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.

13 Click Open.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. For Positioning. select Auto . Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.Origin to Origin. expand Views (all). 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. If you wish to do so. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and make your changes. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Project Units. 11 On the File menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. expand Floor Plans. Notice the blue detail lines. you can go to the Settings menu. and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Project Browser.

15 On the Edit toolbar. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 16 For the move start point. The Move command requires two clicks. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. After you select it. click (Move). Standard move commands work with linked building models. The second click specifies the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 17 For the move endpoint. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The first click specifies the move start point.

select Auto . 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. and select c_Townhouse. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin. For Positioning. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

and click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . To rotate an object. 23 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. when the vertical line displays. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. In this case. you first specify the rotation start point.

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy). Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.

click . click Rotate. 32 On the Edit menu. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. enter Townhouse A. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. for Name. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and click OK. under Identity data. click (Default 3D View). 37 On the View toolbar.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 34 On the Options Bar. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

38 On the File menu. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click (SteeringWheels). they were placed too low within the site topography. In the next exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. do so before continuing. click Save. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. After linking the files. you need this project file open and in this view. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. click and hold Orbit. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. When you originally linked the files. 2 On the SteeringWheels. In this exercise.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. when it highlights. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. When using the Align command. expand Elevations. and click to select the line. click (Align).Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. To do this. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. In this case. Click the Revit Links tab. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. under Views (all). Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and then select the plane that you want to align. 3 In the Project Browser. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 7 On the Tools toolbar.rvt. you first select the plane you want to align to. In the steps that follow. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. and click to select it. and click OK. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that.

11 Return to the South elevation view. 12 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click (Default 3D View). 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click 13 On the View toolbar. under Elevations. click Save. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. click and hold Orbit. 14 On the SteeringWheels. This would over-constrain the model. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 15 On the File menu. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. double-click North. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. (SteeringWheels).

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do so before continuing. If the Basics page is set to Custom. click Custom. 10 Click OK. In this exercise. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. and the halftone settings for each linked project. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. expand c_Townhouse. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. As you can see. or Custom. 4 Under Visibility. By linked view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. you need this project file open and in this view. detail level. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Visibility/Graphics. If you have not completed the previous exercise. display settings. under Elevations. In the next exercise. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 9 Under Visibility.rvt. click By Host View. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only.rvt. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you can independently control the visibility settings. click OK. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. scroll down and clear Levels. 8 For Annotation Categories. When you link a file. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. click the Revit Links tab. 2 On the View menu. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view.

click the Revit Links tab.rvt. select <Custom>. on the Basics tab. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . By default. By selecting custom under Model Categories. and then set the detail level to coarse. under Display Settings. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. 23 In the Model categories list. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 On the View menu. With linked files. You can click the value for Detail Level. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 16 Under Visibility. click the Revit Links tab. 24 Click OK. select Custom. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. or fine.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view.rvt. click By Host View. medium. no detail level changes are required. In this case. 20 For c_Townhouse. expand c_Townhouse. under Floor Plans.rvt. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. double-click Level 1. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.

25 On the Revit Links tab. phase. under Visibility. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. demolished. all new. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. 26 Under Display Settings. In this case.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. this is preferable. In the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Save. click Custom for the Townhouse link. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. In this exercise. there are situations. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. on a sloped site for instance. you need this project file open and in this view. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 31 On the File menu. With the Show All filter applied. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. and phase filter of a specific link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. In this case. However. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 28 Select By linked view for View range. click OK. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.rvt. In most cases. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. existing. By default. select c_Townhouse. you manage the linked files.

In a shared coordinate environment. 5 Click Unload. and Saved Path fields are read only. Notice the Loaded. The default path type is Relative. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. They supply information regarding the links. 4 Under Linked File. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. click Yes. In general. 7 Click OK. You learn more about this in the next lesson. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. the link is maintained. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. click the Revit tab. 3 Under Path Type. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select c_Condo_Complex. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Locations Not Saved. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active.rvt. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click Manage Links. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. do so before continuing. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory.

expand Revit Links.rvt. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. click the arrow next to the Open button. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. In general. click Save As. and select Specify. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. and click Reload. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . However. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. In these cases. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. the link is not loaded. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. If you choose not to open that workset. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. When you initially place the link. 8 In the Project Browser. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. right-click c_Condo_Complex. 9 On the File menu. To do this. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.

it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. In the next lesson. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside.10 In the Save As dialog. and save it as an RVT file. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In this exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. If you have not completed the previous lesson. leave the project file open in its current view. name the file Site_Project. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you are establishing a shared origin point. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. do so before continuing. When you share coordinates between projects. When used in conjunction with model linking. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. and the resulting project files. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In essence. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. The host file consists primarily of site components. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson.

This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. click the Condo Complex. open it before continuing. do so before continuing. Select Site_Project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to.coordinates are used. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.rvt and click Open. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Linking Building Models on page 772. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. and the resulting project files. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 2 On the Tools menu. click Open. As indicated in the Status Bar. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. If you have not completed the lesson. 3 In the drawing area. If you have closed the project. When you are working in the host project.

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click to select it. this location is not saved outside of the host project. On the Status Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. These three locations can be named Lot A. select Location 1. However. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. and click OK. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. In this exercise. do so before continuing. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. you need this project file open and in this view. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. even though both models originate from one linked file. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. it is placed at a specific location. and Lot C. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Lot B. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. If you have not completed the exercise. when the edges highlight. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . but can have multiple additional locations. 5 On the Design Bar. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location.

After a link instance is assigned a shared location.2 On the Options Bar. 4 Under Value. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Move instance to. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 7 In the Rename dialog. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click . click Rename. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. and click OK. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot A for New. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Change. and click OK. In the Choose Location dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click Reconcile. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. Record the current position as a location. When constraining a link to a location. 12 On the Options Bar. This is a one-time operation. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. .

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . The second click specifies the move endpoint. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. The first click specifies the move start point. ignore the warning. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Because Lot A is currently in use. Save locations 21 On the File menu. the active location position is moved. and the left townhouse resides at that location. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. click Duplicate. make sure Lot B is selected. select Save. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. When you create a location. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. and click OK. enter Lot B for Name. select the second option. you cannot redefine its location. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it.Notice the OK button is not active. and then select the townhouse project. and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. Notice the OK button is still not active. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. click Manage Links. 23 Click Save Locations. a warning displays. click OK. To explicitly save a location. This is a two-click process. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. and click OK. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 26 Click OK. or cancel the action. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Record current position as. click the Revit tab. 19 In the Select Location dialog. click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. By relocating a project. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. When you release the mouse button. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click Change. When you relocate a project. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.

you created and saved the locations of each townhouse.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 33 On the Edit menu. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 36 On the File menu. click Save. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. NOTE In the following exercise. and click OK. click Close. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. you work in one of the linked projects. 34 On the File menu. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. In this exercise. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. select Save.

4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.rvt file. click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Because this building model only has one named location. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.By Shared Coordinates. select Auto . Click Open.rvt file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercises. When opening the linked file. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. do so before continuing. The current active location is Lot A.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Floor. Also. it is placed automatically within the host project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . In addition. For Positioning. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Select c_Condo_Complex. if other models were linked into the same host.

and click OK. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. 3 In the Name dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. select True North for Orientation. you create a new location. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In the host file. In this exercise. click OK.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. orient a view to true north. and click Make Current. In this exercise. under Graphics. click Manage Place and Locations. click Duplicate. If you have not completed the exercises. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. and click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you can select Lot C if necessary. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 7 Click OK. click View Properties. you manage the shared locations. you need this project file open and in this view. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Manage Place and Locations. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot C. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. do so before continuing. 6 Select Lot B. In the next exercise. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance.

Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Select Site_Project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 10 On the File menu. click Close. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Open. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.rvt and click Open. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You can save the file if you wish. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. On the Options Bar. do so before continuing. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. If you have not completed the exercise. In this exercise.

click the Fields tab. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click OK. under Category. select Doors. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. select Count. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.

and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. under Other. In this exercise. right-click Door Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 On the File menu. You have completed this tutorial.8 Click OK. and click Properties. 14 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . click Close. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. 12 Select Grand totals. and then click OK twice. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. clear Itemize every instance. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

they are not saved to project files or template files. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click Training Files. you create an office template. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. click the Graphics tab. and your username when using worksets. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click OK. notification preferences. 3 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. In the second lesson. and set it as your default template. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Finally. 803 . you modify the system environment. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 4 Under Colors. Notice that the drawing area is black. and click OK. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. which is independent of the project settings. journal cleanup options. These settings control the graphics. In the first lesson. 6 In the New Project dialog. click Browse.rte. under Template file. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 8 In the New Project dialog. selection default options. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

clear Invert background color. click the Graphics tab. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. select None. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For Selection color. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. and click OK. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 11 Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 12 In the Color dialog. and open Metric\m_Settings. 18 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.10 In the Options dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the wall. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select red. select yellow. 13 Click the General tab. 15 Click OK. click the value for Selection color. click Wall. For Tooltip assistance. click the Graphics tab. However. click Modify. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 22 When prompted to save changes. select One hour. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. the elements causing the error display using this color. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 In the Options dialog. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Training Files. When an error occurs. 14 Under Notifications.rvt. click No.

click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. notice the list of library names. This path is set automatically during the installation process. do not save the changes. click Places. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select your preferred Save reminder interval. 8 Click Cancel. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. family template files. 7 In the Options dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. These files are used in the software support process. centralized. you can start a new project with that template. select Normal. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. TIP To view a template. However. click Browse. click Browse. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. such as in a large. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Your login name displays by default. Under Journal File Cleanup. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. including your default project template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Under Username. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. select the folder to save your files to by default. and click Open. and click Browse to select a template. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Default path for family template files. and family libraries. For Tooltip assistance. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . click the File Locations tab. 10 In the Places dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.27 Click the General tab. 3 Under Default template file. 2 In the Options dialog. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. you specify default file locations. If prompted. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 4 Click Cancel.

An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 11 In the Places dialog. or loading a Revit Architecture file. When you are opening. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.library names and path. saving. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. In the following illustration. templates. and select it as the library path. under Libraries. and you can create new libraries. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and change the name to My Library. and click the icon side of the field. click (Add Value). and Import dialogs. or families. Load.

and Import dialogs. click the Spelling tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. view the current path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 5 In the text editor. 28 Click OK. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and decal image files. 3 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 9 In the text editor. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Save. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Load. 15 Under Library Name. click My Library. click the My Library icon. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 19 Click Cancel. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Edit. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. custom color files. If you want to relocate this path. 2 In the Options dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. 22 Click Places. This path is determined during installation. 24 Click 25 Click OK. and click OK twice. 23 Select My Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

delete sheetmtl-CU. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. do not save the changes. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. If prompted. 22 In the text editor. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. 18 In the Options dialog. click Modify. click Browse. click Training Files. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Text. 14 Click in the drawing area. under Template file. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. you modify snap increments.rte. you modify snap settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. In this exercise. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click OK. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. click Edit. 12 On the Standard toolbar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click the Spelling tab. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . As you zoom in and out within a view. 19 Under Settings. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click default template.11 In the Options dialog. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. 23 In the Options dialog. 21 In the text editor. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.

11 Click in the center of the drawing area. For example. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.. TIP To zoom while sketching.6 Under Dimension Snaps. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click Wall. and move the cursor to the right. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. clear Chain. and enter 500 . 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel button. While sketching. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom out until it does so.

Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. 18 Enter SM.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Do not set the wall end point. it will snap to the endpoints. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 24 Click OK. If you move the cursor along the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and the wall edges. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the midpoint. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and do not save the file. and click Wall. and delete the value 500 . 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. This is the increment that you added previously. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Modify. and specify the wall endpoint.

If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. In the steps that follow. and open Metric\m_Settings. save the project file with a unique name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you create a new material and apply it to a model element.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create and modify materials. Finally. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. and object styles. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. annotations. fill patterns. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . you render a region to observe the changes. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. lines. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls.rvt. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Using these options. When you apply a material to an element.

and texture of the material. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you change properties of a render appearance. When a model element is loaded into a project. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and click OK.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 10 Click the Graphics tab. However. and click OK. The properties describe the color. In the steps that follow. this material provides a starting point for the new material. for Class. and click (Element Properties). Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Replace. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.Stone. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Fieldstone material. and select Masonry . These details will display in rendered images. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. and double-click 02 Entry Level. In the next exercise. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. read-only library for render appearances. scale. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. select Stone. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog.Fieldstone. In the Materials dialog. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 9 Click Apply. Masonry . 3 Click (Duplicate). 11 Click OK. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry .Fieldstone. enter Masonry .

20 In the Materials dialog. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 15 Click Duplicate. and click OK. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. select the rear exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 While pressing CTRL. Fieldstone on CMU. .Fieldstone. 21 Click OK three times. 18 For Finish 1. click This is the material that you created. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Brick. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Fieldstone. and click OK. 26 On the View Control Bar. 16 Enter the new wall name. 25 On the View toolbar. 17 For Structure. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 24 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). click Edit/New. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit. select Masonry . the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click in the Material field. 19 On the right side of the Material field. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .

The rendering process begins. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. under Quality. select Region. When finished.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. right-click the Design Bar. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. and click Rendering. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 29 In the 3D view. click Render. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. for Setting. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select the render region (a red rectangle). select Low or Medium. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click Rendering Dialog. In the following exercise.

and clear Region. expand Elevations.rvt.rvt. 7 Under Custom. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. click Show the model. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. click Import. and double-click West. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Rendering dialog. Zoom into the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Show the model. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 3 Under Pattern Type. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. such as steel. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Drafting pattern density is fixed. m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 5 Click New. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . select Custom. choose Model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. Then click Render again.

23 On the Design Bar. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 10 For Name. select Model.56. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click 15 For Structure. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Fieldstone material. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click to select a fill pattern.Fieldstone. click Edit. select fldstn. click Modify. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click . and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click in the Material field. enter . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . (Element Properties). 13 On the Options Bar. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. In the Materials dialog. 11 Click OK. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .pat. and for Import scale. click Training Files. under Pattern Type. enter Fieldstone. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. click OK. 18 Under Surface Pattern. and click OK. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 22 Click OK three times.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. and click OK. 9 Under Custom. for Finish 1. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

and double-click 3 Windows. there are often multiple window types within a project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. For example. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. TIP If the pattern does not display. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.rvt. 2 On the keyboard.25 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). m_Settings-in progress. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). expand 3D Views. you can set the window frame material to By Category. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. adjust your zoom settings as needed.

and click . 14 In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice. 9 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. . click in the Value column. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties). Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category. 10 Select the arched window. for Trim Exterior Material. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Edit/New. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 11 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. for Trim Exterior Material. click Edit/New. click Modify. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 5 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties).

19 For Trim. click OK. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. click in the Material column. When you render a 3D view. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. select Trim. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. type red. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. or keywords include the word red. and click OK. descriptions.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. 28 Under Shading. . 30 In the Object Styles dialog. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. click OK. and select Trim.red paint. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. expand Windows. 18 On the Model Objects tab. enter Trim . and click OK. select Paint. 25 In the search field. 23 Click Replace. (Duplicate). for Class.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.31 On the View toolbar. is open with the 3D view active. click New. Now that you have created a line pattern. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 11 For Line Pattern. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 7 On the View Control Bar. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Roof Line. 10 For Line Color. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. (Default 3D view). 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Roof Line.rvt. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. select Red.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Settings-in progress. under Category. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Roofs. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.

and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. double-click to Building. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line color displays in this view.12 Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

sections. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Color. select Roof Line. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. for Visibility. double-click 03 Roof. click Override. select Roofs. 19 For Line Pattern. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Blue. 15 In the Project Browser. under Category. 22 On the Model Categories tab. select 5. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 18 For Line Color. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 20 Click OK.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Black. select Solid. Plans. elevations. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Roofs.

27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter Zoning Setback.25 Click OK twice. and click OK. click New. select Red. For Line Color. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. under Floor Plans. Click Click (Draw). This places the line above the topography. (Line). click Lines. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 29 For Name. double-click Site. under Modify Subcategories. select Double dash. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ For Plane. select Level: 02 Entry Level. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 34 On the Options Bar. 31 Click OK. Notice the site topography and the property lines. select Zoning Setback. For Line Pattern. select 2. 33 In the Type Selector.

and clear Property Lines. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Project Browser. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Default 3D View). and then clear Property Lines. 44 On the View toolbar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Lines. 39 Click OK. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. NOTE If Site is not selected. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. select it. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Model Categories tab. double-click 02 Entry Level. Expand Site. under Floor Plans. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. and clear Zoning Setback. and clear Zoning Setback. (Default 3D View).NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 43 Click OK.

m_Settings-in progress.rvt. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. click the default value. m_Settings-in progress. double-click 02 Entry Level. and then click outside the second wall. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click one wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. click Dimension. 9 In the Type Selector.Modifying Annotations In this exercise.Imperial and click OK. 7 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Linear . (Undo). Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged.Imperial. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click another wall. 4 Enter the name Linear . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click Duplicate. for Units Format. For Units. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select Feet and fractional inches. You have created a new dimension style.rvt. 5 Under Text. To place a dimension. 10 On the Standard toolbar.

Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click M_Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type.Number as the assigned tag. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 21 In the Tags dialog.Number. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.14 On the Options Bar. Then press Delete. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 27 On the west wall. 23 Click OK. Leave M_Window Tag . under Category. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 18 In the Tags dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. click the bottom window.Number is now the assigned tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. In the preview image. clear Leader. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click (Element Properties). scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags. 16 Click Cancel. scroll down to Windows. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag .Number. notice that the label displays 1i. In the steps that follow. 19 Click Load. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Training Files. select the 3 window tags. 28 On the Design Bar.rfa. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click Tag ➤ By Category.

click Modify. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Unless overridden. select Faces. for Rounding. 30 Under Leader. Click OK. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 9 Under Doors and Windows. dimension values display using this setting. you modify the detail level assignments. 31 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Units dialog. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and click OK. select Openings. In the final section. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the default value. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. for Length.Temporary Dimensions. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. you specify the project units of measurements.Temporary Dimensions. (Default 3D View). Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.rvt. Unless overridden. select 0 decimal places. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. M_Window Tag . dimensions use these project settings. notice Window Tags appears twice. Specifying Units of Measurement. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 8 Under Walls. you modify the temporary dimension settings. select To the nearest 100. and Detail Level Options | 827 . verify that Create is clear. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. select meters squared. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. Temporary Dimensions. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Number. and click OK. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value.Under Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Area. 32 On the View toolbar. m_Settings-in progress. In the first section. In the second section. the other displays the instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. For Unit symbol. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. click the default value. 6 Click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement.

12 Click OK.rvt. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. You do not select a view scale to move it. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. and expand 3D Views. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls.In this project. expand Floor Plans. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. click Training Files. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. In this table. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. expand Views (all). 13 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and click OK. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. notice that views are grouped by phase. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 5 On the Views tab. 8 Select Phase. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click Apply. expand Sheets (all). expand each view type. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. select Type/Discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. In the Project Browser.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .

14 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click New. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Folders tab. and click OK. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. under Sheets.

If you want to save this file. levels. expand 3D Views. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. When you create a new template based on an existing template. click Training Files. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Complete.rte template. 2 Under Template file. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In the lesson that follows. and click OK. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and view names. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. When you create new projects. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. and Discipline. under Views. navigate to your preferred directory. and click OK. the same rules apply. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. For example. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can choose from several templates. Proceed to the next lesson. dimensions styles. enter a unique file name. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Creating an Office Template | 831 . you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. View Type (Family and Type). The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you select the starting point for your office template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. click Browse. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. and click Open. In that case. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. 21 In the Project Browser. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you create an office template. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. In this lesson. You can also save these settings in a template file. Whenever you create a new project or template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. when you create a new project.

click Browse. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Under Create new. 14 Click Open. in the drawing area. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and double-click North. If you have additional projects open. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 13 Select the default template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. select Project template. you can select it now. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 Click OK. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you modify the project settings for your new template.5 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. for Create new. weights. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. close them. 12 Under Template File. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Project. For example. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. If you want to use a template other than the default. When you create the material. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 9 In the Project Browser.

it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You do this by defining the render appearance. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 9 Click OK when finished. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. and change render appearance properties. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and move model patterns. In the Object Styles dialog. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. see a preview of the rendered material. including color. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. or refer to the online help. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. annotation objects. or modify existing patterns. If you change render appearance properties. TIP For more information about creating new materials. line colors. you can set line weights. and scroll through the list of categories. and similar attributes. 4 Click Replace. and imported objects. create new subcategories. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see the previous lesson. For more details on modifying these settings. transparency. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. line patterns. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. create and modify them as needed. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and materials for model objects. rotate. 13 If necessary. You can align. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. texture. 2 Scroll down the materials list.During this exercise. When you create or modify a material. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Observe the materials that are already defined. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. or refer to the online help. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. For more information.

■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 20 Click OK. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. tags. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. create new line subcategories. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. line color. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. select it from this list.15 Modify categories. or line pattern as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. click Duplicate. and specify the properties. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. such as section lines and dimension lines. 29 Click OK. and click Edit. name the style. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 34 Click OK. select it. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. and dimensions. To see the details of a particular style. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. modify the line weight. 18 For existing line categories. 32 To modify a line pattern. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. You can add and delete view scales. 19 If necessary. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales.

When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and specify the properties. In the Tags dialog. Volume. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and click OK. click Format. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. name the style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. click Load. and Angle settings. select it from this list. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and choose a decimal symbol. 46 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. click Duplicate. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 55 Click OK. Linear. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 62 Click OK. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags.40 Click OK. 58 Click OK. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. For example. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 50 To load new annotation tags. 57 Specify the Slope option. when you add a door with the tag option selected. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 60 Under Walls. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 53 For Length. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. TIP In the drawing area. angular. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.

In a typical project. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. When you create a new view. 71 Delete. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. click the Views tab. 73 Click OK. and move view scales as needed. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. The detail level is based on view scale. create new browser organization types. Medium. However. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. 64 Review the table. 72 If necessary. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 65 Click OK. To move the view scales. or edit existing organization types. or edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 70 Click the Sheets tab. click the arrows between columns. or Fine. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. create new browser organization types. Using the arrows between the columns. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Use the table below as a checklist. rename. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. In such a case. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 68 Delete. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. See Setting up If necessary. 69 If necessary. rename. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. You can find additional information in Help.

the section cut material. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. phase filters. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. If this selection is satisfactory. In addition. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. and the poche depth. and electrical fixtures. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. However. or add to this selection. In the steps that follow. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. or electrical fixtures. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. or use the Project Browser. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. title blocks. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you can move onto the next component type. furniture. you could load detail components. you do both. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. modify. you can set up the phases. notice the list of doors already loaded. If necessary. For example. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. 2 In the Type Selector. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. Although the options are endless. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . Depending on the intended use of this template. Although this is possible.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you may want to delete. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. do so before starting this exercise. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. there are some important thoughts to consider. you can set the default contour line interval. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You can load any family or group into a template. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. click Door. For example.

click Edit/New. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. Select it. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. In the Element Properties dialog. expand Families. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. create. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .3 To modify. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Load. Click Duplicate. or load a new door type. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. click Edit/New. and click OK. create. or modify a door. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Modify type properties. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. and click OK. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Make modifications. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click OK. Enter a name.

13 Click OK. View Range. you create the views required for your template. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. In addition. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Detail Level. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. (Element Properties). and click Delete. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Discipline. This title block is currently part of the template. load. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. you created new projects using different templates. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. In addition. In this exercise. 11 On the Options Bar. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. To load a title block. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. create. and select the title block type. To do so. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.) 10 Expand the title block. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. right-click the component. click 12 Click Preview. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.

it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. and click OK. 2 Under Names. select Site Plan. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. you can apply a view template to any view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. Every time a new plan view is created. and then click OK. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects.settings of categories and subcategories. click Apply. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. under Elevations. At any time. double-click South. and apply the appropriate template. and double-click Level 1. select Architectural Plan. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. the view is not linked to the template in any way. In this exercise. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. you will first modify view templates. 6 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. In addition. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 11 Click Apply. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 4 If necessary. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Apply. After applying the template. open the view from the Project Browser. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. and click OK.

notice that you have the option to rename. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. or delete them as needed. 30 In the Project Browser. click Level. If you want to modify view properties. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. review the floor plans. duplicate. To orient the 3D view to a direction. and select the desired view. right-click the ViewCube. 27 Create additional levels as needed. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. on the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. or an edge of the ViewCube. 31 Rename the 3D View. duplicate. right-click the ViewCube. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. or delete this view. a face. 24 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 .Notice the level names. By default. 21 In the Project Browser. click Orient to View. To orient the 3D view to another view. and select the desired direction. enter a view name. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. If prompted. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ceiling plans. right-click the ViewCube. review the existing floor plans. and elevations. under Floor Plans. If it does not display. click Orient to a Direction. Rename. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. use the ViewCube. select Make Plan View. and click Rename. click Schedule/Quantities. (Default 3D View). and click Save View. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. Black level heads have no associated views. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. 23 To add more levels to the template. in the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. and. expand 3D Views. click 29 In the Project Browser. Blue level heads have associated plan views. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. right-click the view name.

and click OK. Select a view. When you import a DWG or DXF file. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. in the Project Browser. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select and order required fields. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. and click OK. select the category type. Right-click the sheet name. and click Rename. On the Appearance tab. 40 To add views to the sheet. select the default title block. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. click Sheet. select the title block and delete it. To later add a title block to a sheet. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. On the Filter tab. click Add View. modify settings as needed. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 42 Create new sheets as needed. You are prompted to select a title block.txt for AutoCAD. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. You can still add views to the sheet. modify settings as needed. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. expand Sheets (all). 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. After the sheet is created. select one. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. On the Formatting tab. modify settings as needed. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. and modify their properties accordingly.txt for MicroStation). 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. on the View tab of the Design Bar.You can add schedules to a template. 37 Click OK. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. To do so. or exportlayersdgn. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. assign filters.

Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. windows. 2 For each category. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and so on. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Using shared parameters. name the file. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. project parameters. You can save these mappings to a text file. name the file. for example. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. For example. When scheduling. and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. doors. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. therefore. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and they become the set mappings for the project. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. They cannot be shared with other projects. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and click Save. name the file. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Save. 5 For each category. select Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 8 In the dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. 9 Click Save As. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. These settings are retained within the project template. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. click Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight.

select a parameter discipline type. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. project parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. add required parameters. select a parameter value type. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. under Groups. click New. 26 Click OK. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. enter a parameter name.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. you can create a list of parameters. 9 Name the parameter. select a group to add parameters to. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 14 Click Add. 5 Enter the group name. click Add. 25 Click Select. 16 Under Parameter Data. for Name. 11 For each parameter group. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If a file already exists. 21 Under Categories. 24 To add a shared project parameter. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click Create. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 22 Click OK. and specify its discipline and type. select Project parameter. 8 Under Parameters. 17 Under Discipline. and select Shared Parameter. 3 Name and save the file. 6 Create as many groups as needed. click New. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. For each parameter group. 10 Click OK. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. and choose a shared parameter. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you may want to save the file to a network location. 19 Under Group parameter under.

or refer to the online help. you need only select a setting. 2 Under Printer. paper placement. for Name. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 28 Click OK. 37 When you have completed the schedule. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 35 For Name. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 32 Navigate to the directory. you can set options such as sheet sizes. save the file as a template. you create named print settings. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. By creating named settings within the template. The tag is now part of the template. For each printer. make minor modifications if necessary. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. 6 In the New dialog. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 3 Under Settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. and make it your default template file. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 4 Modify the printer settings. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. enter a name for the schedule. and click OK. and print. Click OK. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. For information on creating multi-category tags.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 34 For Category. select Multi-Category. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you can load them into the template. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. By going first to the Print command. and click Open. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. click OK. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. In this exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. click Setup. 5 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select the tag. and the percent of actual size.

The only remaining task is to save it. In addition. 14 Under Save as type. loaded components. click Setup. 18 Click Browse. Create additional settings as needed. 23 For Default template file. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 20 Click OK. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. enter a new name for the printer. and click Open. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. select it. and click Save. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Save as. This can provide a good starting point for a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition. By investing the time to individualize your template. If you have a project. select Template Files (*. and saved them to a template. 22 Click the File Locations tab. If you need to share this file with others. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. and click Open. 24 Navigate to the template location. modify the printer settings.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 19 Select the template. you modified settings. save it in a network location. 9 In the Print dialog. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 11 Click Close when finished. and create new settings for this printer. select a different printer. In this lesson. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.rte). click Browse. 25 Click OK. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Your template is complete. 15 Name the template. and click OK. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful